Gambro Prismaflex Dialysis - Service Manual PDF

Prismaflex®
Service Manual
For use with software version 7.xx
Manufacturer:
Gambro Lundia AB
Box 10101, Magistratsvägen 16, SE-220 10 Lund, Sweden
Tel: +46-46-16 90 00, Fax: +46-46-16 96 96
www.gambro.com
Questions or comments about this publication can be directed to your local representative or to the manufacturer.
Order number:
G5005209
Copyright:
© 2005–2012 Gambro Lundia AB
Gambro, Prismaflex, Adsorba, Prismaflo, Prismacomfort, Prismatherm, MARSFLUX, diaFLUX, diaMARS, X-MARS,
septeX, oXiris, Hospal and MARS are trademarks belonging to the Gambro Group.
G5005209
Program version 7.xx
This page is intentionally left blank
G5005209
Prismaflex® Service Manual
1. Before you get started
2. Installation Guide
3. Technical Description
4. Function Check
5. Alarms and Troubleshooting
6. Maintenance
7. Schematics
8. Specifications
9. Equations
G5005209
Contents
1. Before you get started
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2

Keywords Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Complaint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Responsibility and Disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Safety Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Competence of Service Engineers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Instructions and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:7
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
Transportation and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9
Certification Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
Disposal of Discarded Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
2. Installation Guide
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Contents of Prismaflex® Control Unit Shipping Carton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Electromagnetic Environment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Unpacking and Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Connect Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Install Scale Carrying Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Attachment of caution label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Change of Syringe Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Prismaflex® Control Unit Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Electrical Safety Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Installation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
SW update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11
Calibrate the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12
3. Technical Description
Prismaflex® Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2

Prismaflex® Control Unit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Prismaflex® Control Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Front Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Rear Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:14
Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
Interior — Door (Closed hatch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
Interior — Door (Opened hatch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
G5005209
Interior — Front 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:18
Interior — Front 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Interior — Front 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:22
Interior — Front 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:24
Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:28
Internal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:28
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33
Carrier Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:34
Control CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:35
Protective CPU board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36
ARPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:38
PIB board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:40
Alarm light module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41
LVDS interface board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41
External RS232 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41
External Ethernet board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41
External Remote Alarm Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Fluid pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Blood pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Syringe pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:43
Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:43
Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:43
ABD assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:44
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:45
4. Function Check

Main-controlled Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3
Self–tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:4
Operating System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:4
Initialization Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Prime Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
Pre-Prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
Post-Prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:13
Periodic Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:21
Alarm Monitoring During the Periodic Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:23
Technical Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:24
First Technical Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:24
Second Technical Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:29
Third Technical Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:32
Fourth Technical Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:35
Fifth Technical Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:36
Sixth Technical Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:37
5. Alarms and Troubleshooting
About this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2

Warning Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Prismaflex® Control Unit Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Operator Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Overridden Warning Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4
Malfunction Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:5
G5005209
Overridden Malfunction Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:6
Caution Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:7
Advisory Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8
Overridden Advisory Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8
Alarm Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:9
Alarm Priority List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:9
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:14
About the Troubleshooting Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:14
Warning Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:15
Caution Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:39
Advisory Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:48
Malfunction Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:66
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:97
Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5:101
6. Maintenance

Electrical Safety Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
PET - Protective Earth Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Note: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Check of Conductivity Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
ELT / PLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
General conditions for ELT / PLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
ELT - Earth Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
PLT - Patient Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8
Record of Electrical Safety Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
Remarks: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
Conductivity Clip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
PET - Protective Earth Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
ELT - Earth Lekage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
PLT-Patient Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Component replacement with needed ESI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:12
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Tools Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Working Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Prismaflex® PM Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Visual Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Component Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
G5005209
Power Supply Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Exchange of Lead Batteries for Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Service Mode - Checkout using Service Diagnose Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21
Service Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:22
Service - Diagnose Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:24
Diagnose Screen – Pumps Diagnose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:26
Diagnose Screen – Scale Diagnose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:28
Diagnose Screen – Pressure Pod Reposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:30
Diagnose Screen – Alarms Tone and Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:32
Diagnose Screen – Air Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:34
Diagnose Screen – Syringe Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:36
Diagnose Screen – Clamp and Pinch Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:41
Diagnose Screen – BLD (Blood Leak Detector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:43
Diagnose Screen – Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:44
Diagnose Screen – Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:45
Diagnose Screen – PM timer and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:53
Diagnose Screen – Clean Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:55
Diagnose Screen – SW Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:56
Diagnose Screen – 2D Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:57
Service Calibration Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:58
Calibration Screen – Language Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:60
Calibration Screen – Scales Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:61
Calibration Screen – Pressure Sensors Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:64
Calibration Screen – Syringe Pump Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:66
Calibration Screen – Filter Clotting Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:68
Calibration Screen – Set Clock and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:69
Calibration Screen – Screen Brightness Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:70
Calibration Screen – Pitch and Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:71
Calibration Screen – External Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:72
Calibration Screen – Therapy/Sets Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:73
Calibration Screen – Anticoagulation Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:76
Calibration Screen – Anticoagulation Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:78
Calibration Screen – Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:84
Calibration Screen – Air Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:85
Calibration Screen – IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:86
Calibration Screen – Syringe Holder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:87
Calibration Screen – Supplementary Syringe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:88
Calibration Screen – Settings Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:90
Calibration Screen – Blood Warmer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:92
Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:94
Final Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:97
7. Schematics
8. Specifications
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Flow Rates and Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Blood Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Automatic Blood Return Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Replacement Solution/Fluid Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Dialysate Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
PBP Solution Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:4
Patient Fluid Removal Performance / Patient Plasma Loss Performance . . . . 8:4
G5005209
Effluent Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:4
Syringe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:5
Systemic, Prismaflex syringe pump anticoagulation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:5
Citrate – Calcium, Prismaflex Syringe Pump anticoagulation method . . . . . . 8:6
TPE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6
Pressure sensor range, accuracy and alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7
Effluent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9
Patient safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9
Air Bubble Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9
Blood Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9
Alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Sound pressure levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Visual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Weight, dimensions, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Scales Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Scale Weight Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Scale accuracy: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Line power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:12
External communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:12
Environmental data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:13
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:13
Transportation and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:13
Noise level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:13
Vibration levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Fluid spillage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Cleanability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Electromagnetic Emissions and Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
AC Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
Defibrillation-proof Applied Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
Radio Frequency Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
Potential Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20
Continuous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20
Conformity to International Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:21
Medical Device Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:22
Prismaflex® Disposable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:23
CRRT Disposable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:24
Low flow sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:24
Priming parameters and Blood flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:24
Patient fluid removal and Patient fluid loss/gain limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:24
Solution flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:25
Return Blood and Recirculation flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:25
High flow sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:26
Patient fluid removal and Patient fluid loss/gain limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:26
G5005209
Solution flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:27
TPE Disposable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:28
Low flow sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:28
High flow sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:29
HP Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:30
Priming parameters and Blood flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:30
Return Blood and Recirculation flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:30
9. Equations
Blood pump flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2

Filter pressure drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
Effluent flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
Transmembrane pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
Total predilution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
CRRT prescription indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
Filtration Fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
Doses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:4
Patient fluid removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:5
Access transmembrane pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:5
Software Calculations of Target Patient Plasma Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:5
Formulas used in TPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:6
Patient plasma loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:6
PBP flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:7
Syringe flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:7
G5005209
G5005209
Chapter 1
Before you get started

About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Keywords Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Complaint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Responsibility and Disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Safety Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Competence of Service Engineers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Instructions and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:7
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
Transportation and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9
Certification Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
Disposal of Discarded Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
G5005209 Prismaflex® Service Manual - Before you get started 1:1

About this Manual
This service manual provides the information needed to install
the Prismaflex control unit, to carry out maintenance, component
replacements and calibrations. It is a guidance on how to identify and
repair faults that may occur.
All available spare parts to be used for the Prismaflex control unit are
found in the illustrated Spare Parts List.
This service manual also provides a technical description of the

functionality of the Prismaflex control unit, including technical data.
Keywords Used in this Manual

Authorized service technicians
This term refers to Gambro trained and certified service technicians.
Filter
Depending on the therapy in use, Filter stands for either:
• Hemofilter/Dialyzer
• Plasmafilter
• Hemopurification cartridge
Manual
The term Manual refers to this Service Manual unless specified
differently.
Operator
In this manual, Operator designates appropriately trained and qualified
clinical staff who is in charge of the Prismaflex control unit. The
operator sets the prescribed values in accordance with the prescribed
treatment, responds to alarms, troubleshoots the Prismaflex control
unit, handles the bags, etc. Once the training material is read
through and understood, the operator is approved to operate the
Prismaflex control unit. The operator works within one meter from the
front of the Prismaflex control unit.
Responsible Organization
In this manual, Responsible Organization means a function or a person
who can identify, analyze, and control potential risks that could occur,
for example, when connecting the Prismaflex control unit to other
equipment or when making changes to the equipment connected to
the Prismaflex control unit.
Screens
The Prismaflex control unit displays different screens during operation.
Whenever a screen is referred to in this manual, it is identified by its
title, e.g. Enter Flow Settings screen or Status screen.
1:2 Prismaflex® Service Manual - Before you get started G5005209

Softkeys
Whenever a Softkey on the Prismaflex screen is referred to in this
manual, it is written in capital italic letters, e.g. NEW PATIENT or
CHANGE BAG.
Training Material
The operator's manual is the primary training material for staff who is
to operate the Prismaflex system. See section “Competence of Service
Engineers” on page 1:5, for information concerning the minimum level
of competence required for service engineers.
Complaint
If a complaint is raised it shall be communicated to the relevant Gambro
Sales Company. In order for the Sales Company to be able to determine
the relevance of a complaint, it is of vital importance that the deviation
is communicated to them as comprehensive as the issue requires.
Responsibility and Disclaimer

Gambro accepts responsibility for the safety, reliability, and
performance of this equipment only:
• If any modifications to the equipment have been authorized in

writing by Gambro and carried out by an authorized service
technician.
• If the electrical installation for powering the equipment complies

with all applicable local electrical codes and requirements
including, if applicable, IEC requirements.
• If the equipment is used in accordance with the Service Manual

and the Operator's Manual.
Gambro will provide, on request, a service manual which contains

all necessary circuit diagrams, calibration instructions, and service
information to enable authorized service technicians to repair those
parts of this equipment which Gambro considers to be repairable.
Gambro does not accept any responsibility or liability for use of

accessories or disposables other than those specified in this manual
or if any specified accessory or disposable is not used in accordance
with this manual, online instructions and the Instructions for Use
accompanying those accessories and disposables.
Since Gambro has no control over service work which is not

performed by authorized service technicians, Gambro will in no way
be responsible or liable for any damages resulting from the operation
or performance of any device, or any injury caused thereby, after repair
has been performed by any person other than an authorized service
technician of Gambro.

Under no circumstances will Gambro be liable for any indirect,
incidental, special or consequential damages of any kind, its liability
being hereby limited solely to repair or replacement.
Safety Definitions
This manual uses the following safety definitions :
WARNING
A warning alerts the reader about a situation which, if not avoided,
could result in an adverse reaction, injury or death.
WARNING
CAUTION
A caution alerts the reader about a situation which, if not avoided,
could result in minor or moderate injury to the user or patient or
damage to the equipment or other property.
CAUTION
Note: Notes are added to give more information.

Maintenance
To ensure proper operation of the Prismaflex control unit, an authorized
service technician must perform a complete series of maintenance
procedures at regular intervals.
The maintenance and calibration information is provided in this

Service Manual, see Preventive Maintenance on page 6:13.
It is mandatory to perform at least one preventive maintenance once a

year or every 6000 hour. The rate of preventive maintenance might be
different due to variations of the operating environment.
Competence of Service Engineers

There is a certain minimum level of competence required for Service
Engineers who maintain and repair Gambro products, summarized
as follows.
A Service Engineer is considered authorized if he/she has:
1. Attended Prismaflex technical service course and has been given a

certificate stating that the technician has passed the course.
2. Access to the recommended test equipment and special tools

detailed in this Service Manual.
3. Access to the recommended Prismaflex control unit - Spare parts

List.
4. Access to and understanding of the Prismaflex control unit - Service

manual and the Prismaflex control unit - Operator's Manual.
In general, this policy implies that training will be carried out by

Gambro Lundia AB, while local markets are responsible for their own
service organization.
Technical Support
For technical support please contact your local Gambro Service
representative or visit the website.

Symbols
If applicable, the following symbols appear on or near the serial
number label or other permanently affixed labels of this device. For
more information, see chapter 8: “Specifications” on page 8:2.
Electrical Safety
Equipment applied part is Type BF, defibrillation - proof per IEC
60601-1.
Note: To be sure of the Prismaflex control unit’s classification see type
label found at the back of the Prismaflex control unit.
Equipment applied part is Type CF, defibrillation-proof per IEC

60601-1.
Note: To be sure of the Prismaflex control unit’s classification see type
label found at the back of the Prismaflex control unit.
Device meets the “drip proof” classification requirements.
Device requires an alternating supply current.
Nearby high-voltage conductors could be hazardous if contacted.
This symbol is located near functional ground locations on this device.
This symbol is located near protective ground locations on this device.
This symbol identifies the point of connection of a potential

equalization conductor.
The terminal is connected to the chassis and should be connected to
corresponding terminals on other equipment in order to eliminate
potential differences.
Fuse.
Certain components within this equipment are sensitive to electrostatic

discharge.
Instructions and warnings

Attention, consult accompanying documents.

Read instructions before use.
This symbol warns against an incline of the Prismaflex control unit of

more than 5° from the floor.
Note: This warning label must be applied on the warmer holder before
use. It should be mounted on deliverance. The background color is
yellow.
Pull out scale completely before hanging bag.
Pull out scale completely before hanging bag.
Risk of tipping the Prismaflex control unit from pushing, leaning,

resting, etc. The colors are red, white, and black.
This symbol is applied on the stand if the Prismaflex calibration weight

kit is stored inside. Calibration weights are to be removed before tilting
the Prismaflex control unit into horizontal position.
The color is black on a yellow background.
Information
Date of manufacture with year as four digits.
Manufacturer. The year of manufacture may be included in the symbol

expressed as four digits.
Catalog number.

Serial number.
Communication
Ethernet port.
RS232 Serial Communication port.
Remote alarm connection.
Environmental
This symbol indicates that:
– since the equipment contains dangerous substances, it must be
recycled rather than disposed together with other municipal waste;
– the equipment was placed on the market after 13 August 2005.
The device contains toxic or hazardous substances or elements.
Recycle the cardboard.
Transportation and storage

Fragile – handle with care.
Keep dry.
The maximum stacking load permitted on the transport package is

100 kg.
This end up.

Atmospheric pressure limitation. Upper and lower limits are expressed
with numeric values in kPa.
Humidity limitation. Upper and lower limits are expressed with

numeric values in %.
Temperature limitation. Upper and lower limits are expressed with

numeric values in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Solutions
Circle sign; placed as colored symbol on effluent scale and in the
graphical user interface in screens related to effluent. On the disposable
set the symbol is a relief shape in the plastic cover indicating the
effluent pump.
Triangle sign; placed as colored symbol on PBP scale and in the

graphical user interface in screens related to PBP. On the disposable
set the symbol is a relief shape in the plastic cover indicating the PBP
pump.
Square sign; placed as colored symbol on dialysate scale and in

the graphical user interface in screens related to dialysate. On the
disposable set the symbol is a relief shape in the plastic cover indicating
the dialysate pump.
Octagon sign; placed as colored symbol on replacement scale and in

the graphical user interface in screens related to replacement. On
the disposable set the symbol is a relief shape in the plastic cover
indicating the replacement pump.

Certification Marks
The CE-conformity mark indicates that the Prismaflex control unit
conforms to the requirements in the EC Council Directive 93/42/EEC
of 14 June, 1993 concerning medical devices. It also indicates that
the notified body British Standards Institution (BSI, No. 0086) has
approved the Quality Management System. The CE conformity mark
is only valid for the Prismaflex control unit. Disposables and any
accessories specified for use with the Prismaflex control unit are
marked with CE conformity marks in their own right.
The CSA (C-US) mark indicates that the Prismaflex control unit
conforms to the requirements related to safety of medical devices for
the US and Canada. The “C” and the “US” adjacent to the CSA mark
indicate that the Prismaflex control unit has been evaluated to the
applicable ANSI/UL and CSA standards for use in the US and Canada.
The CCC mark indicates that the Prismaflex control unit conforms to
the safety requirements for China Compulsory Certification (CCC) as
described by the competent authority Certification and Accreditation
Administration of People's Republic of China (CNCA). The “S”
adjacent to the CCC mark indicates that safety requirements are met.
Disposal
The Prismaflex control unit shipping carton, foam packing, and
other packaging material should be disposed of according to local
regulations.
For the purpose of protecting the environment the Prismaflex control

unit must not be disposed with general domestic waste, but shall be
separately collected for dismantling and recovery. Where applicable
national regulations shall be applied. Consult your relevant Gambro
Sales Company for information.
Disposal of Discarded Equipment

Discarded electromedical equipment must not be disposed together
with municipal waste but must be collected separately in order to
guarantee ecologically correct disposal to prevent dispersion of
potential pollutants into the environment.
Pay attention to the fact that some components of the Prismaflex control
unit (display, batteries, circuit boards, etc.) may contain toxic
substances which, if released into the environment, pose a risk to the
health of living organisms and the environment itself.
The Prismaflex control unit contains a lithium energy cell and

a lead-acid battery. The lithium energy cell is embedded in a
semiconductor on the monitor circuit card assembly. When replacing
these components, follow local regulations for proper disposal.

Chapter 2
Installation Guide
Contents
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Contents of Prismaflex® Control Unit Shipping Carton . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Electromagnetic Environment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Unpacking and Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Connect Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Install Scale Carrying Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Attachment of caution label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Change of Syringe Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Prismaflex® Control Unit Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Electrical Safety Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Installation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
SW update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11
Calibrate the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12
G5005209 Installation Guide 2:1

About this Chapter
This chapter describes the installation procedure of the
Prismaflex control unit. The installation must be performed by an
authorized service technician.
2:2 Installation Guide G5005209

Installation
WARNING
Read these installation instructions before starting installation.
Read the Prismaflex Service Manual and perform the installation
test before first use.
All electrical installations must comply with all applicable local

electrical codes and manufacturer specifications.
The assembled Prismaflex control unit weighs approximately 78 kg

(172 lb). Use at least two people to lift it out of the shipping carton.
Handle the Prismaflex control unit carefully.
WARNING
Contents of Prismaflex® Control Unit Shipping Carton

Each Prismaflex control unit is pre-attached to a column and a base
with casters. The Prismaflex control unit comes packaged with the
following items:
• Installation kit:
- United States-style power cord, with retaining bracket
- Continental European-style power cord, with retaining bracket
- 4 screws
- 4 scale carrying bars
• 20 ml syringe clip
• Pump crank
• Caution stickers
• Potential equalization connector
• Prismaflex Operator’s manual on CD

Electrical Requirements
The Prismaflex control unit operates from an electrical power source
that delivers the following:
• from 100 (–10%) Vac to 240 (+10%) Vac; from 45 Hz to 65 Hz
It is essential that the power socket is properly grounded and in good

condition. If there is any doubt regarding the condition of the power
cord, have the wiring checked by a qualified electrician.
Electromagnetic Environment Requirements

The Prismaflex control unit requires special precautions regarding
EMC and needs to be installed and put into service according to the
EMC information provided in the Operator’s Manual.
Space Requirements
The assembled Prismaflex control unit requires a minimum of 63 cm
× 63 cm (25 in × 25 in) of floor space. There must be enough space
around the Prismaflex control unit so that all fluid bags can hang freely
from the scale carrying bars.
Unpacking and Assembly

CAUTION
Be careful when you move the Prismaflex control unit, so that you
don't make it fall over.
CAUTION
Unpacking
1. Open the shipping carton. Carefully lift the Prismaflex control unit
out of the carton and place it upright. Carefully remove the foam
packing and pay attention not to damaging the Prismaflex control
unit components. Dispose of the shipping carton, foam packing,
and other packaging material according to local regulations.
2. Inspect all components, paying particular attention to the front

panel of the Prismaflex control unit. If any damage has occurred,
immediately contact your local sales or service representative.

Connect Power Cord
Tool needed: Torx T-20
1. Select the appropriate power cord and cable support package.
Note: If the supplied power cord does not fit the wall socket, contact
an authorized electrician that can connect the power cord to the wall
socket.
2. Insert the power cord into the cable support, so that the cable
support fits tightly against the female connector of the power cord.
(A)
3. Turn the cable support by half a turn so that the cable support
guide is downward. (B)
4. Plug the power cord into the power cord socket on the rear panel
of the Prismaflex control unit.
5. Using the 4 screws provided, secure the cable support to the studs
on either side of the power cord socket. Tighten the screws using
the Torx T-20. (C)
6. The Prismaflex control unit has a connection on the rear panel

for a Potential Equalization Conductor. If required, connect the
Potential Equalization Conductor to the connector.
Figure 2:1 Connecting the Power Cord

Install Scale Carrying Bars
Working one scale at a time, install the carrying bars into the bar trays
of the four scales.
1. Open the scale, place a carrying bar on the bar tray.
2. Rotate the carrying bar so that the handle is pointing toward the
floor; close the scale.
Note: Scale will not close properly unless the handle of the carrying
bar is rotated toward the floor.
Figure 2:2 Placing the Carrying Bars on the Scales
Attachment of caution label

Tools needed: Cleaning Material
Perform the following steps to attach the caution labels to the front
panel:
1. Clean the area of Prismaflex control unit where the stickers are to
be placed according to point 3 in Visual Inspection and Cleaning
on page 6:15.
2. Place the sticker next to the handle of the Effluent scale and the
Replacement scale.
Note: The pictures on the stickers are not identical. Blue area on sticker
is to be facing towards the Effluent scale and the Replacement scale.

3. Check that all stickers are firmly attached to the surface of the
Prismaflex control unit.
4. Clean the surface on and around the stickers.
Change of Syringe Clip

Tools needed: Torx T-20
Perform the following steps to perform the change of the syringe clip:
1. Enter Service mode, Diagnose Screen - Syringe pump.
2. Using the syringe pump hard keys, move the plunger to its bottom
position.
3. Switch off the Prismaflex control unit.
4. Remove the Torx screw (T-20).
5. Slide the syringe plate down.
6. Slide in the new syringe plate.
7. Fasten the screw that holds the syringe plate.
8. Select the correct size of the syringe clip and perform a

configuration of the syringe holder, see Calibration Screen –
Syringe Holder Configuration on page 6:87.
Prismaflex® Control Unit Calibrations
CAUTION
The installer is required to use an ESD (electro-static discharge)
Grounding Wrist strap during this procedure to avoid unintentional
damage to the electronic devices in the Prismaflex control unit.
Do not remove any cards or IC chips from their antistatic containers

until you are ready to install them. When removing cards or chips
from a system, immediately place them in an antistatic bag or
container.
When handling cards or IC's, hold them by their edges. Avoid

touching the components and connector leads on the card. Avoid
touching the leads on the IC.
Do not slide cards or IC's over any surface. Avoid plastic, vinyl
and Styrofoam in your work area.
CAUTION
Before first use of the Prismaflex control unit, the operations below
must be performed in Service mode by an authorized service technician
and recorded in the Maintenance Log (attached to the inside wall of
the rear panel).

Calibration instructions are provided in Service Calibration Screens on
page 6:58.
1. Plug the power cord into the wall socket and turn on the
2. Verify all scales, calibrate if necessary.
3. Verify the syringe pump, calibrate if necessary.
4. Check all pressure sensors, calibrate if necessary.
5. Set the time and date.
6. In service mode, select CALIBRATE –

LANGUAGE CONFIGURATION and install the required language.
7. Configure therapies, disposable sets, anticoagulation options, and

blood warmer, if applicable.
As default the Prismaflex control unit is enabled for CRRT. Default

filter set available is M60 and M100.
Electrical Safety Inspection

To ensure proper operation, an Electrical Safety Inspection (ESI)
of the Prismaflex control unit shall be performed. Inspection is
performed according to instructions found in section “Electrical Safety
Inspection” on page “6:4”. Test shall be documented in specific record
and stored for future reference.
Installation Test
Note: Read the Service’s Manual before performing the installation
test.
Before the first use of the Prismaflex control unit on a patient, the
installation test must be performed with a Prismaflex CRRT set in
place on the Prismaflex control unit. The installation test verifies that
the Prismaflex control unit is properly installed. The test is performed
using saline solution as a substitute for priming solution and fluid bags,
and a container of water as a substitute for the patient. Successful
completion of the installation test indicates that the Prismaflex control
unit is functioning properly.
Supplies needed:
• Prismaflex CRRT set
• 4 fluid bags (saline solution) 1000 ml each
• 1 fluid container 1000 ml, filled with 500 ml tap water
• Catheter, 8F

To perform the installation test, follow the steps below;
1. Turn on the Prismaflex control unit. The Prismaflex control unit

performs an initialization test to check the system electronics,
startup signal sounds twice and status lights (green, red and yellow)
are lit during the test.
2. Choose NEW PATIENT when the Choose Patient screen

appears and enter patient information.
3. Check that the SCUF, CVVH, CVVHD, CVVHDF softkeys

are available on the Choose Therapy screen. Choose the
CVVHDF therapy.
4. Choose NO ANTICOAGULATION as
Anticoagulation Method.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen to load and prime the set. Use
saline solution as a substitute to priming and dialysate solutions.
The Prismaflex control unit performs multiple self-tests during
the priming cycle.
6. When the prime and the prime test are completed, press
CONTINUE. The Enter Treatment Settings screen
appears. Set the Loss/Gain Limit to 140 ml/3h. Press
CONFIRM ALL.
7. The Enter Flow Settings screen appears. Set the following

flow rates and press the CONFIRM ALL softkey.
Blood: PBP: Dialysate: Replacement: Fluid Removal Rate:

180 ml/min 1100 ml/h 1200 ml/h 1300 ml/h 200 ml/h
8. When the Review Prescription screen appears, verify the
above flow rates, then press CONTINUE.
9. When the Connect Patient screen appears, place the access

and return lines preferably connected through an 8F catheter into
the container of water. Press CONTINUE.
10. The Verify Patient Connection screen appears. Press

the START softkey, to enter Run mode.
Note: Because the installation test is performed with

water, the Warning: Return Disconnection and
Advisory: Cannot Detect Return alarms could occur
after the Prismaflex control unit has entered Run mode. If either of
these alarms occur, press CONTINUE/OVERRIDE (depending on
active alarm) and continue with the test. The alarms will not affect the
outcome of the installation test.
11. Note the hour and minute on the Status screen when the
Prismaflex control unit enters Run mode (this information can be
found in History screen, pressing EVENTS softkey).
12. Run the installation test for at least 15 minutes.

13. Place a clamp on the access line (red) below the cartridge.
The Warning: Access Pressure Extremely
Negative alarm should occur. Verify that the red light is flashing
and the audible alarm sounds with a high sound, 10 sound pulses
repeated approx. every 8 seconds.
14. Unclamp the access line and press the CONTINUE softkey
on the Warning screen. Verify that the alarm is cleared
(Warning screen leaves display, green light lit).
15. Check the Battery Backup function.

Note: Performed only if the Prismaflex control unit has Battery
Backup installed. See section “Third Technical Screen” on page
4:32, Power section. Otherwise continue with step 19.
Disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. The
Advisory: Main Power Lost alarm should occur. Verify
that the yellow light is permanently lit and the audible alarm
sounds with a low sound, 2 sound pulses repeated approx. every
21 seconds.
16. Press the OVERRIDE softkey. The Advisory screen leaves the
display, but remains in Examine Alarms. Yellow light is lit, the
Prismaflex control unit returns to the Status screen and the battery
icon, in the top right corner of the display, is lit.
17. Connect the power cord to the wall socket. Verify that the battery
icon disappears and that the Prismaflex control unit continues
in run mode. Verify that the alarm is cleared from the Examine
Alarms (press SYSTEM TOOLS softkey and verify that the
EXAMINE ALARMS softkey is not present) and green light lit.
18. Press the STOP softkey, then press the END TREATMENT softkey
and follow the instructions to unload the set.
19. In service mode, select Diagnose Screen – PM timer and Date. Set
and verify the PM timer.
20. Document the Prismaflex control unit configuration with either of

the following:
- Download the logging data of the simulated treatment (LOX

file) from the technical data card, and attach it to the GFS
record, OR
- Download the logging data of the simulated treatment

(LOX file) from the technical data card, and email it to
barcode@gambro.com, OR
- Take a photo of the barcode in Service mode according to

instructions in Service - Diagnose, 2D Barcode, and send it to
barcode@gambro.com
21. Exit Service mode.

SW update
1. Check that the machine is switched off.
2. Open the cabinet using an 8 mm Hex key.
3. Swing open the bracket mounted with protective and PIB board
to access the PC-board.
4. Connect a PC keyboard to the PS2 connector on the PC 104 board.
5. Turn on the machine and insert the software upgrade CD into the
CD-player.
Note! Software 7.xx requires PC-104 board (PCM-9375) to work.
6. Switch the main switch to OFF to restart the machine, wait 5

seconds and switch it ON again to boot from the CD.
7. A list with different boot setups is displayed.
8. Press 1 on the PC keyboard to start the software download –

“Initiate all”.
9. A question appears; do you want to continue, press Y on the PC

keyboard.
10. When the software upgrade is complete a message “Press any key
to continue.” occurs.
11. Remove the software CD and PC keyboard.
12. Switch the main switch to OFF to restart the machine, wait 5
seconds and switch it ON again.

Calibrate the display
1. Make sure that the Prismaflex control unit is switched OFF before
starting the procedure.
2. Open the back door using the 8 mm Hex tool.
3. Set the SW1 (Dip Switch 1), on the Carrier board, to the ON
position.
4. Turn on the Prismaflex control unit and follow the instructions

given on the screen.
5. Turn off the Prismaflex control unit when the message

Press STOP to convaliate the calibr. appears or
press SET(S).
6. Set the switch SW1 (Dip Switch 1), to the OFF position.

Chapter 3
Technical Description
Contents
Prismaflex® Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2

Prismaflex® Control Unit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Prismaflex® Control Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Front Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Rear Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:14
Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
Interior — Door (Closed hatch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
Interior — Door (Opened hatch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:18
Interior — Front 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Interior — Front 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:22
Interior — Front 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:24
Interior — Front 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:26
Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:28
Internal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:28
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33
Carrier Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:34
Control CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:35
Protective CPU board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36
ARPS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:38
PIB board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:40
Alarm light module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41
LVDS interface board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41
External RS232 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41
External Ethernet board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41
External Remote Alarm Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Fluid pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Blood pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Syringe pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:43
Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:43
Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:43
ABD assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:44
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:45
G5005209 Technical Description 3:1

Prismaflex® Control Unit
The Prismaflex control unit is pre-attached to a column and a base with
casters. For installation see Installation Guide on page 2:1.
Prismaflex® Control Unit Functions

The Prismaflex control unit is a software-controlled device that
performs the following functions:
• Loads and primes the Prismaflex disposable set automatically.
• Pumps blood through the blood flowpath of the

Prismaflex disposable set.
• Delivers anticoagulant solution into the blood flowpath.
• Pumps sterile infusion solutions into the blood flowpath of the

Prismaflex disposable set, according to therapy in use.
• Pumps sterile dialysate into the fluid compartment of the filter in

CRRT therapies.
• Controls the patient fluid removal or plasma loss, according to

the therapy in use.
• Monitors the system and alerts the operator to abnormal situations

through alarms.
3:2 Technical Description G5005209

Prismaflex® Control Unit Components
The Prismaflex control unit components are divided into:
• Front Panel
• Rear Panel
• Interior Components
Front Panel Components

The front panel components of the Prismaflex control unit are
illustrated and described in the following figures.
• Figure 3:1 on page 3:4 shows the pumps.
• Figure 3:2 on page 3:6 shows the pressure components.
• Figure 3:3 on page 3:8 shows sensors and clamps.
• Figure 3:4 on page 3:10 shows the scale components.
• Figure 3:5 on page 3:12 shows miscellaneous components.

Figure 3:1 Pumps
1. Dialysate/replacement 2 pump
CVVHD, CVVHDF: Pumps dialysate solution into the fluid
compartment of the filter.
CVVH: If post-filter replacement delivery has been chosen and

replacement solution has been placed on the green scale, this pump
delivers replacement solution into the post-filter blood flowpath.
2. Replacement pump
Pumps replacement solution/fluid into the blood flowpath.
CRRT: Replacement solution can be delivered either pre- or

post-filter.
TPE: Replacement fluid is always delivered 100% post filter.

3. Blood pump
Pumps blood through the blood flowpath of the Prismaflex dis-
posable set.
4. Pre-blood pump (PBP)

If required, pumps a solution into the blood access line at a location
immediately after patient blood enters the line and before the blood
pump.
In “Citrate – Calcium, Prismaflex syringe pump” anticoagulation

the PBP is the pump infusing the citrate solution into the blood
access line.
5. Syringe pump assembly

The pump assembly holds the solution-filled syringe and controls
the rate of delivery. Delivery can be continuous or in boluses.
In “Systemic, Prismaflex syringe pump” anticoagulation method,

the syringe pump delivers anticoagulant into the blood flowpath.

method, the syringe pump delivers calcium solution into patient via
a separate central venous access.
6. Effluent pump
CRRT: Pumps ultrafiltrate/dialysate; automatically controls the
ultrafiltration rate, based on the operator-set patient fluid removal
rate, PBP, dialysate, replacement, and syringe flow rates (if
applicable).
TPE: Pumps removed plasma; automatically controls the

plasmafiltration rate based only on the operator-set patient plasma
loss and replacement fluid rates. PBP and syringe flow rates are not
considered in the effluent pump rate.
7. Pump raceway
Tubing pathway within each peristaltic pump. The raceways accept
the pump segments of the Prismaflex disposable set.
8. Rotor
Center component of each peristaltic pump that rotates during pump
operation. Holds two rollers that occlude the pump segment in the
raceway. Occlusion moves the fluid in the pump segment forward
in discrete amounts and prevents backflow.

Figure 3:2 Pressure components

1. Return pressure port
Connects to the monitor line of the deaeration chamber on the
Prismaflex disposable set. A pressure sensor (transducer) located
behind the pressure port enables noninvasive pressure monitoring
of the return line and deaeration chamber. A fluid barrier at the
distal end of the monitor line protects the return pressure sensor
from accidental blood entry.
2. Effluent pressure pod
3. Deaeration chamber holder

Holds the deaeration chamber of the Prismaflex disposable set.
4. Filter pressure pod
5. Access pressure pod
6. Pressure sensor housings

Housings that hold the pressure pods of the Prismaflex disposable
set. A pressure sensor (transducer) is located behind each housing.
The sensors and pressure pods enable noninvasive pressure
monitoring of the access, filter, and effluent lines. There are no
air-blood interfaces.
7. Pressure pod (not used, for future therapy)

Figure 3:3 Sensors and clamps

1. Discharger ring guide
Holds the electrostatic discharger ring of the Prismaflex disposable
set. The main function of the discharger ring is to lower the voltage
potential in the blood/fluid path. As a result, artifacts on cardiac
monitors will be minimized.
Always install the discharger ring in its guide before connecting a
patient to the Prismaflex disposable set.
2. Air bubble detector (housing also has a tubing detection switch

and a patient blood sensor)
Ultrasonic transmission/detection device that continuously monitors
the return line for air bubbles. A Warning alarm occurs if a bubble
is detected.
Tubing detection switch (physically moves down when tubing is
installed).
Patient blood sensor (infrared sensor that detects if blood is in the
tubing).
3. Return line clamp (assembly also has a tubing detection switch)

Occlusive clamp that closes during all Warning and Malfunction
alarms, when power is off, and during some self-tests. Prevents
blood and/or air from passing to the patient.
For patient safety, a tubing detection switch is also located in the
return clamp assembly. The switch physically moves down when
tubing is correctly installed under the clamp.
4. Pinch valves (upper and lower)

CVVH, CVVHDF: Upper pinch valve accepts tubing coming
from the dialysate/replacement 2 pump; lower pinch valve accepts
tubing coming from the replacement pump. The valves open/close
automatically to allow pre- and post-filter options for delivery of
replacement solution.
5. Bar code reader

The bar code reader that decodes the bar code on the
Prismaflex disposable set during the set loading procedure. With
this information, Prismaflex software accesses the default alarm
limits, flow rate ranges, and priming sequence for the set that is
loaded.
6. Syringe control panel

Consists of UP and DOWN buttons that allow installation and
removal of the syringe. The buttons are activated/inactivated by
Prismaflex software, depending on operating conditions.
7. Blood leak detector

Continuously monitors the effluent line for the presence of red
blood cells, indicating a leak in the filter membrane. A warning
alarm occurs if red blood cells are detected.

Figure 3:4 Scale components

1. Dialysate scale (green square)
2. Replacement scale (purple octagon)
3. Scale carrying bar assembly

The bar tray on each scale holds a removable carrying bar with
three hooks. Using a table or other support, bags may be attached
to/removed from the hooks. After the carrying bar is replaced in
the bar tray, it must be rotated so the handle is toward the floor, so
the scale can be properly closed.
Various sizes of bags can be used, depending on the scale.
4. Effluent scale (yellow circle)
5. PBP scale (white triangle)
6. General scale Information

Independently monitor fluid bag/container weights. Weight is used
by Prismaflex software to precisely control solution flow rates and
patient fluid removal /plasma loss. An alarm sounds when the
PBP, dialysate and replacement solution bags/containers are nearly
empty, or when the effluent bag is nearly full.
The operator pulls the bar tray of a scale out (away from) the control
unit to attach or remove bags/containers. When the tray is pulled
out, the scale is in “open” position; when the tray is completely
pushed in, the scale is in “closed” position. An alarm sounds if the
scale is open when operating conditions require it to be closed.

Figure 3:5 Miscellaneous components

1. Status light
Lights up to give a general indication of operating conditions.
Green constant light: Indicates that all monitored parameters are

normal during administration of the treatment (Run mode).
Yellow constant light: Indicates that an Advisory alarm has

occurred, or an alarm has been overridden. Immediate patient
safety is not compromised, but the operator should investigate (Run
mode).
Note: During modes in which a patient treatment is not in progress
(Setup, Standby, End, and Custom mode), yellow indicates that
monitoring is active, and that all monitored parameters are normal.
Yellow flashing light: Indicates that a Caution alarm has occurred.

Immediate patient safety is not compromised, but the operator
should investigate (Run mode).
Red flashing light: Indicates that a Warning or Malfunction alarm

has occurred because of a condition of possible patient hazard.
Immediate operator intervention is required (Run mode).
2. Tubing clips
Secure the blood lines going to the patient, including the PBP line.
Route tubing through clips closest to patient, according to color
coding.
3. Tubing guides
Hold the lines of the Prismaflex disposable set in correct position
on the control unit. The color of each tubing guide matches the
color of the line it holds.
4. Loader
Loads the Prismaflex disposable set.
5. Side hooks (left and right side)

Bags can be put on this hook.
6. Recessed handles (left and right side)
7. Display
Shows text and softkeys. Provides operating, alarm, and help
instructions. Pressing the softkeys allows the operator to change
settings, start and stop functions, and navigate between screens.
8. Upper clip
Supports the calcium infusion line when performing “Citrate –
Calcium, Prismaflex syringe pump” anticoagulation method.
Temporarily holds the return line during setup of hemopurification
sets.

Rear Panel Components
Figure 3:6 Prismaflex control unit: Rear Panel
1. Speaker
Creates alarm sounds.
2. Fan
Provides continuous ventilation for the interior components of the
control unit.
3. Hour meter
Displays operating hours (cumulative time that power to the
Prismaflex control unit has been on).

4. Remote alarm connection
Connection for an optional remote alarm (for example installed in
a nursing station).
5. Buzzer (inside)
Transmits a continuous buzz if a power loss occurs.
6. Rear handle (bottom)
7. Power cord holder
8. Power cord socket
9. Connection for potential equalization conductor

Potential equalization terminal is connected to the monitor chassis.
It can be connected to corresponding terminals on other equipment
to eliminate potential differences. Do not use it for additional
protective grounding.
10. Power switch
11. Pump crank
12. Technical data card holder

You can copy history data to a technical data card.
13. Ethernet port

An IP addressable port for data exchange with a personal computer
or communication network. Network communication ability is only
intended for sending out data and will not receive data that changes
the settings in the Prismaflex control unit.
14. RS232 serial communication port

For data exchange with a personal computer, communication
network or modem. Network communication ability is only
intended for sending out data and will not receive data that changes
the settings in the Prismaflex control unit.
15. Rear handle (top)

Interior Components
Only authorized service technicians have access to the interior of the
Prismaflex control unit and are allowed to perform service maintenance
on the Prismaflex control unit.
This section is divided into:
• Door
• Front
Interior — Door (Closed hatch)

1. Remote alarm board
For use with external alarms.
2. Power Supervision Board

Power Supervision board detects unintended switch off during
treatment.
3. RS 232 board
Enables external serial data communication with the
4. Memory board
Prismaflex control unit interface for the technical data card.
5. Ethernet board
Enables external Ethernet communication with the
6. PIB board
Peripheral Interface Board. Contains the circuitry and connections
for the UABD, venous clamp, BLD and the pinch valves.
7. Log book
Update the Prismaflex control unit log book when the service is
performed.

Interior — Door (Opened hatch)

1. Protective board
Controls the Protective system.
2. Power supply
Supplies DC voltage to the Prismaflex control unit.
3. RAM memory
Internal memory for the PC 104 board.
4. PC 104 board
Control system CPU.
5. Compact flash
Placed on backside of PC 104 board, stores the Prismaflex software.
6. Carrier board
Interface for the PC 104 board.
7. Hour meter
Counts the total running hours of the Prismaflex control unit. Not
only the treatment hours.

Interior — Front 1

1. PBP (Pre-blood pump)
A stepper motor runs the slave pump rotor which rotates the PBP
pump.
2. Blood pump
Runs the Blood pump rotor.
3. Syring pump assembly

Administrates the syringe fluids.
4. Replacement pump
A stepper motor runs the slave pump rotor which rotates the
replacement pump.
5. Dialysate pump
dialysate pump.
6. Effluent pump
Effluent pump
7. Loader board
Controls the loader stepper motor.
8. Loader stepper motor

Maneuvers the loader.
9. Micro switch
Detection for completely loaded Prismaflex disposable set.


1. Access pressure sensor
2. Filter pressure sensor

Cable length 50 cm
3. Effluent pressure sensor

Cable length 100 cm
4. Return pressure port
5. Pressure sensor
Fifth pod. Not used, for future therapy. Cable length 70 cm
6. Blood Leak Detector BLD

Infrared blood leak detection (detects presence of red blood cells
in the effluent line).
7. Pressure transducer
Measures reference pressure for the ARPS (Automatic
Repositioning System).
8. ARPS pump
The pump is used for the ARPS and for adjusting the level in the
bubble trap.
9. ARPS stepper motor

The motor is used for the ARPS and for adjusting the level in the
bubble trap.
10. ARPS tubing

Connects the complete pressure system.


1. LED board
Alarm light-green, yellow and red
2. Display
Graphical user interface.
3. Touch screen control

Handles the information from the touch screen.
4. Discharge clip board

Connects the discharger clip to earth.
5. Bar code reader

Recognizes the filter set loaded on the Prismaflex control unit.
6. Return clamp
The return clamp has two functions:
• Clamps the return line.
• Tubing detection switch.
7. Air Bubble Detector ABD

The ABD has three functions:
• Ultrasonic transmission/detection (device that continuously

monitors the return line for air bubbles. A Warning alarm occurs
if a bubble is detected).
• Tubing detection switch.
• Infrared patient sensor. (Not used)
8. Pinch valve
The pinch valves open/close, depending on which therapy is
chosen, to allow pre- and post-filter options for delivery of
replacement solution.
9. CD-Rom player
CD/DVD reader


1. Main switch assembly
2. Battery, 24 V
Provides the possibility to proceed treatment during a power
failure. For more information see Power Failure on page 5:101.
3. Battery, 12 V
Not present in newer configurations of the Prismaflex control unit.
4. ARPS board
All pressure sensors and the ARPS valves are connected to this
board.

Electrical Description
Internal Connections
The figures below shows the internal connections between boards.
Internal Connections (Display with integrated LVDS)

Internal Connections (Display with out integrated LVDS)

The figures below shows the routing for the internal I2C
communication. Each board except the Blood pump has two I2C
connectors connected in parallel. Buffering is made on each board
using an I2C line driver type Philips 82B715. The I2C bus consists of
4 signals (+5V, SDA, SCL and GND). The +5V supply is connected
to the Blood pump board, but it is possible (through jumpers on each
board) to set a different configuration of the +5V supply.
I2C Interconnection Diagram

Modules
The electronic design consists of the following main modules:
• Power supply unit (PSU)
• Protective CPU board
• Carrier board (working as motherboard for the Control CPU)
• Control CPU (PC-104)
• ARPS board
• PIB board
Supporting and connected modules are:
• Slave fluid pumps
• Blood pump
• Syringe pump
• Loader
• Scales
• ABD assembly
• Blood leak detector
• Pinch valves
• Venous clamp
• Pressure valves
• Pressure sensors
• Bar-code reader
• Technical data card holder
• Remote alarm
• External RS232 & Ethernet boards
• Power supervision board

• LVDS interface board
• Touch screen controller
• TFT display with backlight inverter and touch screen
• Alarm light and buzzer
• Hour meter

Power Supply
The power supply provides the following DC voltages referred to
a common ground:
Voltage Low High Nominal Description

limit limit current
+24Vm 22.8V 25.2V 15A Positive 24V used as supply mainly to actuators. This
(shared voltage is enabled by the signal ENABLE_24Vm from
with the Protective CPU board. When the PSU is running on
currently battery in 24V mode (UPS mode) these limits can be
unused ignored and the voltage might follow the battery voltage
+24Vc) (max 1V below battery voltage)
+12Vout 11.9V 12.3V 4.0A Positive 12V used for supply of analogue parts as well
as the ARPS pump
+5Vd 5.1V 5.3V 6A Positive 5V generally used for digital circuitry
+5Vprot 5.1V 5.3V 5A Positive 5V used for digital circuitry in the protective
system and also used for miscellaneous digital circuitry
–5Va –5.4V –5.1V 2.0A Negative 5V used as supply to analogue parts
The system reference ground is in the power supply unit, and all
sub-system grounds originate from here to avoid ground loops as well
as power noise on sensor signals.
Description Signals Interfacing board(s)/module(s)

Protective CPU supply & +5Vd, +5Vprot, +12Vout, Protective CPU board
PSU voltage supervision –5Va, +24Vm, GND
Enable of actuator power ENABLE_24Vm From Protective CPU board
Carrier board (Control +5Vd, +12Vout, Carrier board (signals POWER_FAIL,
CPU) supply & PSU POWER_FAIL, ENABLE_24Vm and POWER_RESET are
status POWER_RESET, passed by the Carrier board to the Protective
ENABLE_24Vm, GND CPU)
ARPS supply +12Vout, –5Va, +24Vm, ARPS board
GND
PIB supply +5Vprot, +12Vout, –5Va, PIB board
+24Vm, GND
Slave pump & Loader +5Vd, +24Vm, GND PBP/Infusion pump, Replacement pump,
supply Dialysate pump, Effluent pump, Blood pump
and Loader
Syringe pump supply +5Vprot, +24Vm, GND Syringe pump control board
Scales supply +12Vout, –5Va, GND PBP/Infusion scale, Replacement scale,
Dialysate scale and Effluent scale
Back-up battery test TEST_BAT From Protective CPU board
Battery test status OUT_TBAT To Protective CPU board

Carrier Board
The Carrier board has the following main functions:
• Motherboard for the Control CPU
• Backlight inverter control for user interface TFT screen
• Provides I2C communication to the PC-104 compatible Control

CPU
• Contains a 512kB battery backed-up memory for storage of

data from therapies, events and alarms (384kB) and used for
communication and for the PCMCIA controller supporting the
Technical data card interface

Power input +5Vd, +12Vout, GND From PSU
Power status POWER_FAIL, POWER_RE- From PSU To Protective CPU
SET, ENABLE_24Vm and GND board
Interface to Control CPU 16-bit ISA-bus PC-104 signals Control CPU board
External RS232 Rx, Tx, RTS, CTS, +5Vd, GND External RS232 interface board
LCD backlight inverter power +12Vout, +5Vd (NC), To LCD backlight inverter
and control Brightness, Refhigh (NC), (STEPDW enables inverter)
STEPDW and GND
Bar-code reader power and +5Vd, BARCODE_TRIGGER To Bar code reader module
control and GND (BARCODE_TRIGGER enables
bar code reader LED)
Technical Data Card Reader 68 pin PCMCIA interface To PCMCIA holder
Control CPU buzzer request AUX_BUZZ_IN, GND To Protective CPU board
I2C bus +5Vd, I2C_SDA, I2C_SCL, Protective CPU board
GND

Control CPU
The Control CPU is a PC-104 compatible PC with a Pentium processor
industrial standard. VxWorks is used as Operating System. The
Control CPU has the following main functions:
• Runs the treatment (including priming and end-of-treatment etc.)
• Supervises the behaviour of the Prismaflex control unit
• Controls the subsystems ARPS and PIB as well as fluid pumps,

Blood pump, Syringe pump, scales and loader (through I2C)
• Managing requests from Protective system (through I2C)
• GUI control
• Provides connection to external Ethernet interface
• Supports the Touch screen controller through RS232 / COM1
• Supports the Bar-code reader through RS232 / COM2
• Supports the CD-ROM through IDE

Connection to motherboard 16-bit ISA-bus PC-104 signals Carrier board
Touch screen interface Full RS232 interface on Control Touch screen controller
CPU COM1
Bar-code reader interface RS232 interface (Rx and Tx) on Bar-code reader
Control CPU COM2
TFT output 44-pin connector LVDS transmitter board. Present
only on older Prismaflex control
units. (See Service Newsletter
for Prismaflex control unit
numbers)
CD-ROM interface 40 signals on 44-pin connector CD-ROM player

standard IDE-cable
External Ethernet IRX–, IRX+ ITX– and ITX+ External Ethernet board

Protective CPU board
The Protective CPU board has the following main functions:
• Monitors the activity of the Prismaflex control unit and forcing

the Prismaflex control unit in a Safe State through a specific
state request to the Control System in case of mismatch with the
appropriate Safety Criteria
• Activates of tests T0 and T1 to monitor the Hardware integrity (T0

and T1 are standards for electrical/mechanical safety for medical
device)
• Request the control system to activate Specific Safe State

conditions
• Activates the General Safe State if previous specific safe state

condition was not met or if a severe failure condition occurred
• Supervises PWR_FAIL and PWR RESET signals
• Supervises all supply voltages (both from PSU and from ARPS)
• Handle the air bubble alarm
• Supervises the scales (through I2C)
• Supervises (directly) the speeds for Blood pump and Syringe pump
• Supervises (through I2C) the speeds for Dialysate pump, Effluent

pump, Infusion pump and additional PBP (Pre-blood pump)
• Supervises (through I2C) the Access pressure, Return pressure,

Filter pressure, Effluent pressure, Auxiliary pressure and ARPS
pump line pressure
• Activates the alarm lights and speaker
• Activates remote alarm
• Enables the Blood pump relay
• Enables the +24V for pumps
• Enables the +12V for ARPS actuators
• Back-up battery test and monitoring

PSU voltage supervision +5Vd, +5Vprot, +12Vout, –5Va, From Power Supply Unit (PSU)
+24Vm, GND
PSU status monitoring POWER_FAIL, EN- From Carrier board
ABLE_24Vm, POWER_RE-
SET, GND
Enable of actuator power ENABLE_24Vm To PSU
ARPS board actuator power ENABLE_12, GND To ARPS board
control
ARPS board voltage monitoring VDD_ARPS, AVCC_ARPS, From ARPS board
VREF_ARPS
Pump inhibition /APSTOP To PBP/Infusion pump,
Replacement pump, Dialysate
pump, Effluent pump and Blood
pump
Power enable for Blood pump ENABLEMOT To Blood pump (this signal is in
fact connected to the Blood Pump
Relay board and disconnects the
pump from the supply when e.g.
manual end-of-treatment is used)
Blood pump speed supervision BP_ENCODER From Blood pump
Syringe pump supervision SPEED_OUT, DIR_OUT From Syringe pump
ABD (Air Bubble Detection) ABD_TEST, UB_TEST (not PIB board
management used), ABD_Alm_Rst_A,
ABD_Alm_Rst_B and
ABDA_ALM
ABD trouble detection TRBL_ALM From PIB board
Visual Alarm LAMP_POWER (= +5Vprot), To Alarm light module
RED_LAMP, YELLOW_LAMP,
GREEN_LAMP
Audible Alarm COIL_OUT, GND To alarm buzzer
Control system alarm control – AUX_BUZZ_IN, From Carrier board
currently not used GND-pull-down
Power supply to Touch screen +5Vd, GND To touch screen controller

controller
Power supply to CD-ROM +5Vd, GND To CD-ROM player
player
Power supply to hour meter +5Vprot, GND To hour meter
Power supply to fan +12Vout, FAN_ENCODER, To fan (3 signals; +12V, GND
GND and FAN_ENCODER)
I2C bus +5Vd, I2C_SDA, I2C_SCL, Carrier board and PIB board
GND
Back-up battery test TEST_BAT To PSU
Battery test status OUT_TBAT From PSU

ARPS board
The ARPS (Automatic Repositioning System) board has the following
main functions:
• Monitors the pressure values from Access pressure sensor, Return

pressure sensor, Filter pressure sensor, Effluent pressure sensor
and Auxiliary pressure sensor
• Monitors the internal ARPS pump line pressure sensor
• Controls the valves between the ARPS pump and the pressure
sensors for access pressure, return pressure, filter pressure, effluent
pressure and auxiliary pressure
• Controls the ARPS pump to adjust pressure sensor membrane

positions and for creating pressure levels for taring and testing
the pressure sensors
• Handles the increase or decrease of the fluid level in the deaeration

chamber
• Provides voltage references for pressure sensor bridges and internal

ADC; +10V for sensor bridges (ARPS_VDD), +5Vref for ADC
and +2.5V for pressure sensor neutral position reference

Access pressure sensor voltage ARPS_VDD, AP_High_bridge, Access pressure sensor
reference and measurement AP_Low_bridge, GND, Shield
signal
Return pressure sensor voltage ARPS_VDD, VP_High_bridge, Return pressure sensor
reference and measurement VP_Low_bridge, GND, Shield
signal
Filter pressure sensor voltage ARPS_VDD, FP_High_bridge, Filter pressure sensor
reference and measurement FP_Low_bridge, GND, Shield
signal
Effluent pressure sensor voltage ARPS_VDD, EP_High_bridge, Effluent pressure sensor
reference and measurement EP_Low_bridge, GND, Shield
signal
Auxiliary pressure sensor voltage ARPS_VDD, Auxiliary pressure sensor
reference and measurement AuxP_High_bridge,
signal AuxP_Low_bridge, GND,
Shield
ARPS pump line pressure ARPS_VDD, ARPS pressure sensor
sensor voltage reference and ARPSP_High_bridge,
measurement signal ARPSP_Low_bridge, GND,
Shield
Control of Access pressure ARPS_VDD, AV_Open drain To access pressure sensor valve
sensor valve
Control of Return pressure ARPS_VDD, VV_Open drain To return pressure sensor valve
sensor valve
Control of Filter pressure sensor ARPS_VDD, FV_Open drain To filter pressure sensor valve
valve
Control of Effluent pressure ARPS_VDD, EV_Open drain To effluent pressure sensor valve
sensor valve
Control of Auxiliary pressure ARPS_VDD, AuxV_Open drain To auxiliary pressure sensor
sensor valve valve
Control of ARPS pump ARPS_VDD, 4 open drain To ARPS pump
H-bridge outputs for stepper
motor coil
I2C bus +5Vd, I2C_SDA, I2C_SCL, PIB board and Effluent Scale
GND

PIB board
The PIB board has the following main functions:
• Handles the air bubble detector
• Monitors the optical switch to detect that the blood line is present
in air bubble detector
• Activates the venous clamp (through I2C)
• Monitors the venous clamp position
• Monitors the blood detector (through I2C)
• Monitors the blood leak detector (through I2C)
• Controls and monitors the position of pinch valve for dialysate line
• Controls and monitors the position of pinch valve for infusion line

Monitoring of air bubble detector UABD_RCV, UABD_TRANS- ABD (Air Bubble Detector)
MIT, REF_BIG, REF_MICRO, assembly
GND
Monitoring of blood detector PTSR_K, PTSR_A, PTST_A, ABD (Air Bubble Detector)
PTST_K assembly
Monitoring of blood line present +5VP, UABD_LS, LSS2, GND ABD (Air Bubble Detector)
detector assembly
Monitoring of blood leak BLDT-A, BLDT-K, BLDR-A, Blood leak detector board
BLDR-K, GND
Control of Dialysate line pinch CL_MOT2_OUT1, To dialysate line pinch valve
valve CL_MOT2_OUT2
Control of Infusion line pinch CL_MOT1_OUT1, To infusion line pinch valve

valve CL_MOT1_OUT2
Monitoring of Dialysate line +5VP, PV_OPT_COM, From dialysate line pinch valve
and Infusion line pinch valves S1_MOT1, S2_MOT1, and Infusion line pinch valve
position S3_MOT1, S1_MOT2, position detector board
S2_MOT2, S3_MOT2, GND
Control of venous clamp CLAMP_CMD, +24Vm To venous clamp
Monitoring of venous clamp +5VP, VCP, LVCS, GND Venous clamp detector board
I2C bus +5Vd, I2C_SDA, I2C_SCL, Protective CPU board and ARPS
GND board

Alarm light module
The Alarm light board consists of two rows of LEDs on three different
PCBs mounted in a triangle to provide 360° visibility. One of the LED
rows displays red and yellow light. The other displays green light. The
alarm light is controlled by the Protective CPU.

Visual Alarm LAMP_POWER (= +5Vprot), To Protective CPU board
RED_LAMP, YELLOW_LAMP,
GREEN_LAMP
LVDS interface board

Note: LVDS transmitter board is only present on older
Prismaflex control units. See Service Newsletter for specific
Prismaflex control unit numbers.
The LVDS interface board converts the parallel digital LCD display
signals from the Control CPU into serial LVDS signals.

Parallel LCD interface 24 bit color, VSYNC, HSYNC, Control CPU board
SHFCLK, DE, ENAVDD,
+12Vout, +5Vd and GND
LVDS to TFT screen 4 shielded TP LVDS signals, TFT screen
TFT_VCC, +5Vd and GND
External RS232 board

The external RS232 board provides an isolated serial communications
port for external equipment.

Power and communication for Rx, Tx, RTS, CTS, +5Vd, GND Carrier board
external RS232 interface
External Ethernet board

The external Ethernet board provides an isolated Ethernet port for
external equipment.

External Ethernet interface IRX–, IRX+ ITX– and ITX+ Control CPU board
signals

External Remote Alarm Connector
The external Remote Alarm interface provides a summary relay
interface to a remote alarm device. The summary relay closes the
circuit when Prismaflex control unit issues a Warning alarm, a
Malfunction alarm or an Advisory alarm. Whenever the issued alarm
is overridden (or in some cases when softkey CONTINUE is pressed),
the relay opens the remote alarm circuit. The relay circuit must be
powered by the remote alarm device.

Open / Closed relay circuit for Open /closed relay circuit pin 1 Remote Alarm Relay Board
connection to a Remote Alarm and 4
device. Relay rating: 26VAC @
1A
WARNING
The clinic/user is solely responsible for connecting a remote alarm
to the Prismaflex control unit and for verifying its function. If a
remote alarm is used, the operator is responsible for periodically
checking on the patient in person.
WARNING
Fluid pumps
The Dialysate pump, Effluent pump, Replacement pump and additional
PBP (Pre-blood pump) are all slave pumps with individual electronics
boards. These pumps are controlled through commands passed through
the I2C communication bus. Each pump has an unique I2C address
and this address is configured using jumpers on the intergrated circuit
board. The fluid pumps are responsible to control and monitor the
pump rotation direction and speed according to the commanded value.

Power supply input +24Vm, +5Vd, GND From PSU
Blood pump
The Blood pump is a slave pump with an individual electronics board.
The pump is controlled through commands passed through the I2C
communication bus. The Blood pump controls the pump rotation
direction and speed according to the commanded value.

Power supply input +24Vm, +5Vd, GND PSU
Motor stop and supervision BP_ENCODER, /APSTOP, Protective CPU board
ENABLEMOT
Monitoring of speed and +5Vd, Position_1, Position_2, Hall sensors mounted on motor
direction GND
I2C bus +5Vd, I2C_SDA, I2C_SCL, Replacement pump
GND

Syringe pump
Depending on the selected anticoagulation method, the syringe pump is
used for infusing anticoagulant or calcium solutions. The Syringe pump
controls and monitors the infusion to the line set by moving its actuator
to push the piston of a syringe, when commanded by the Control
CPU (through I2C). There are built-in detection of end-of-stroke and
overload and the presence of a syringe can be detected.
The movement of the actuator, during installation of syringe, can be
performed manually through the two hardkeys on the side of the
Prismaflex control unit or the softkeys on the screen.
Power supply input +24Vm, +5Vprot, GND PSU
Motor stop and supervision SPEED_OUT, DIR_OUT Protective CPU board
I2C bus +5Vd, I2C_SDA, I2C_SCL, Replacement scale and PBP /

GND Infusion pump
Loader
The Loader handles the mounting of an attached line-set by pulling it
in position so that the fluid pumps and Blood pump can auto route the
pump segments into the slave pump runways.

Power supply input +24Vm, +5Vd, GND PSU
I2C bus +5Vd, I2C_SDA, I2C_SCL, Effluent / infusion pump and
GND Dialysate / infusion pump
Scales
The scales provides a reading of weight of the different fluid bags to
two different channels for the Control and Protective systems. Also
reporting to Protective that the bag holder is properly inserted into the
scale. All information is passed through I2C.

Power supply input +12Vout, –5Va and GND PSU
I2C bus +5Vd, I2C_SDA, I2C_SCL, Effluent scale: ARPS board and
GND PBP/Infusion scale PBP/Infusion
scale: Effluent scale and
Dialysate scale Dialysate
scale: PBP/Infusion scale and
Replacement scale Replacement
scale: Dialysate scale and
Syringe pump

ABD assembly
The ABD has the following main functions:
• Detects air in the blood returned to the patient
• Detects blood in the return line

Signals
This section describes the signals between the modules inside
Signal name Description From To

EN_24Vm TTL square wave > 3 Hz used as Protective PSU
watchdog to enable the +24Vm voltage.
UB_TEST Logic TTL signal, Protective activates Protective PIB
this signal (active low) 4 times each
second for a duration of 8ms to test the
air bubble detector. The air bubble alarm
must then be activated within 5ms.
ABDA_ALM Logic TTL signal, PIB sends this signal PIB Protective
to protective when a macrobubble has
been detected.
TRBL_ALM Logic TTL signal, PIB sends this signal PIB Protective
to protective when trouble has been
detected, which means that the AGC has
not been able to control the amplitude of
the received signal.
ABD_Alm_Rst_A Logical TTL signal to clock the flip-flop Protective PIB
for air bubble detector alarm. Not active
status is high.
ABD_Alm_Rst_B Logical TTL signal for clearing data Protective PIB

of the flip-flop for air bubble detector
alarm. Not active status is high.
/APSTOP Logic TTL signal to enable the driver Protective P1, P2, P3, P4
stage of the pumps P1, P2, P3, P4 and and BLD
BLD.
Brightness control Analog voltage (0 – 3.75V) to control Carrier Inverter

brightness of backlight to TFT.
Refhigh 3.75V Carrier Inverter

STEPDW Logic TTL signal to enable inverter for Carrier Inverter
backlight to TFT.
DIR_OUT Logic TTL signal to indicate Syringe Syringe pump Protective
pump direction.
(Low = CW, up. High = CCW, down)
SPEED_OUT TTL square wave from magnetic encoder Syringe pump Protective
to verify the speed of the Syringe pump.
16 pulses for each mm of vertical
movement.
ENABLE_12 Enable signal from protective to activate Protective ARPS
the 12V power on the ARPS board used
for the ARPS pump. It is a square wave
TTL level of 20 Hz frequency which
stimulates the watch-dog on the ARPS
board.

Signal name Description From To
ARPS_VDD +10V reference voltage for pressure ARPS Protective
sensor bridges.
ARPS_AVCC +5V reference voltage for pressure ARPS Protective

sensor ADC.
ARPS_VREF +2.5V reference voltage for neutral ARPS Protective
position reference for pressure sensors.
COIL_OUT Analog sinusoidal signal 1 kHz, 1.5 kHz Protective Speaker
or 2.5 kHz sent to the alarm speaker
(buzzer). The maximum amplitude can
be 2Vpp with offset 0V.
AUX_BUZZ_IN Digital square wave signal TTL level of Carrier Protective
frequency 1 kHz, 1.5 kHz or 2.5 kHz
sent to the from Carrier to Protective.
POWER_FAIL Logic TTL signal. Low indicates that PSU Carrier and
no power from the supply line has been Protective
detected. (through Carrier)
POWER_RESET Logic TTL signal. Low indicates the PSU Carrier and
PSU is in reset condition. Protective
(through Carrier)
FAN_ENCODER Open collector pulse signal from cooling Cooling Fan Protective
Fan pull-up on Protective board used to
read the speed of the Fan.
BAR- Logic signal TTL level; Low level Carrier Bar-code reader
CODE_TRIG indicates that barcode reader is active.
TFT_VCC A delayed +5V power to the TFT. The LVDS_Tx board TFT
delay is controlled by a signal from
Control CPU; ENAVDD.
ENAVDD Digital signal TTL level controlling the Control CPU LVDS_Tx board
output power to the TFT.
BP_ENCODER Digital signal TTL level pulses indication Blood pump Protective
of Blood pump motor speed. (gear box
30:1)
ENABLEMOT Digital signal open drain to connect Protective Blood pump
the Blood pump motor to the driver
H-bridge. Low level connects the motor
to the bridge. Relay coil at motor is used
as pull-up.
TEST_BAT Digital open drain signal to activate Protective PSU
battery test by connecting a resistive load
to the back-up battery and monitoring
the resulting voltage across the battery.
Low level activates the test.
OUT_TBAT Digital TTL status signal for back-up PSU Protective
battery test. Low level during the test
indicates that the battery is charged.
High level indicates low battery voltage.

Chapter 4
Function Check
Contents

Main-controlled Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3
Self–tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:4
Operating System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:4
Initialization Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Prime Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
Pre-Prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
Post-Prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:13
Periodic Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:21
Alarm Monitoring During the Periodic Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:23
Technical Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:24
First Technical Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:24
Second Technical Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:29
Third Technical Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:32
Fourth Technical Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:35
Fifth Technical Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:36
Sixth Technical Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:37
G5005209 Function Check 4:1

About this Chapter
Prismaflex control unit software continually monitors the operation
of the Prismaflex control unit and the Prismaflex disposable set. To
ensure the functionality of the Prismaflex control unit throughout the
whole treatment several tests are performed. These tests can be divided
into four sets of self-test. This chapter describes the sequences.
4:2 Function Check G5005209

Main-controlled Components
Structure of commands and communication of the Prismaflex control

unit

Self–tests
The Prismaflex software continually monitors the operation of the
Prismaflex control unit and performs diagnostic self tests to ensure that
the operation is within specifications. Each self-test consists of a series
of subtests done in a sequential order. The self-tests can be separated
into four different categories:
• Operating System Initialization
• Initialization Tests
• Prime Self-Tests
• Periodic Self-Tests
Operating System Initialization

The Operating System Initialization test starts when the
Prismaflex control unit is switched on, and consists of two subtests:
1. Basic Input Output Software (BIOS)
2. VxWorks Operating System
1. BIOS Software
When the Prismaflex control unit is switched on, the Basic Input
Output Software (BIOS) of the PC104 is executed. The BIOS executes
a memory test on the PC104 board RAM and its ability to communicate
with hardware components.
During the initialization the boot file (bootrom.sys) is read and
executed from the first sector on the PC104's compact flash.
2. VxWorks Operating System
The system boots each of the boards in the Prismaflex control unit.
The following boards are initialized:
- Carrier Board
- Protective Board
- PIB Board (Peripheral Interface)
- ARPS Board (Automatic Repositioning System)
When the boot file is finished being read the VxWorks application
program is initialized. VxWorks is a real time multi-tasking operating
system used to run the application program of the Prismaflex control
unit.
The VxWorks screen appears and the application programs begin to
load from the PC104's compact flash.

Initialization Test
The initialization test checks that the Control and Protective
microprocessors and memory are operating properly. When
the initialization test begins, the Logo screen appears on the
Prismaflex control unit display, the non-mutable buzzer sounds,
and the status lights are lit during the test. After the initialization
test completes, the Prismaflex control unit enters Setup mode. The
initialization test consists of seven subtests, of which six are automatic
and one is up to the service technician to verify:
1. Processor Flag Check
2. Write-to and Read-from RAM
3. Calculation of Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRCs)
4. Communication between Microprocessors
5. Audio & Visual Alarm Activation
6. Information Structures Stored in Main Compact Flash and

Protective CPU Eprom
7. Start-up Conditions
1. Processor Flag Check
The processor verifies that all condition flags can be set.

This test accesses the protective system, microprocessor registers and
branch instructions. The test verifies that the protective slave can
receive output data instructions.
2. Write-to and Read-from RAM
Whatever is read from the RAM must match what is written.

The protective system RAM is verified in a two-step process. First
the protective system writes predefined data to a fixed address of the
RAM. Secondly the protective system tries to read the data from the
fixed address of the RAM. The protective system then compares the
written and read data and verifies that the information is the same.
This verification is performed on the Carrier (channel processor) and
Protective systems.
3. Calculation of Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRCs)
The calculations must match the CRCs stored in ROM. If the

calculations are correct, the ROM is not corrupted.
Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) is a process which verifies that
program data is not corrupt. By summing all the bits of the information
in a software program a CRC can be calculated and represented as
a 16–bit number in hex format.
During the initialization of the application programs CRC verifications
are performed on the slave boards to ensure that the program data has
not been corrupted.

The following software programs located on the slaves are CRC
checked during initialization (both boot loader and application software
are checked):
- Carrier Slave (software for channel processor)
- Protective Slave
- PIB Slave
- ARPS Slave
- Scales
The software of the Protective Task that was executed on PC104 is

CRC checked by calculating the CRC of the PROTEC.OUT file and
comparing it with the CRC written in the PROTEC.CRC file. Both
files are located on the Compact Flash of the PC104 board.
4. Communication between Microprocessors

Both Control and Protective microprocessors must write and read
data from the I2C bus. This process verifies that both systems can
communicate with all hardware connected to the I2C bus.
5. Audio & Visual Alarm Activation
The Protective system activates the Green, Yellow and Red LED
alternately. The buzzer is activated during this process. The
Prismaflex control unit has no internal monitoring for this process so
it is the responsibility of the operator to verify the correct operation
of this process.
6. Information Structures Stored in Main Compact Flash and

Protective CPU Eprom
Two verifications are performed here; (a) Checksum Verification (b)

Range Verification
a. Checksum Comparison
Checksum of each structure is compared to the software-calculated
checksum for that structure. Information structures stored on the
PC 104 compact flash and the Protective system processor are
verified for errors.
A checksum of the following information structures are
performed:
- SDB (System Data Base)
- Custom.ini (stores all the different settings made by customer)
- Library.ini (stores all the default settings)
b. Range Check
Information structures which contain minimum and maximum
setting values are range checked to ensure the range is valid.

7. Start-up Conditions
The Prismaflex control unit displays information about next preventive
maintenance. Messages that can appear is:
- “Overdue” if PM not done within time
- “Due in dd day(s)” if calendar time is nearest PM
- “Due in hhh hour(s)” if operation time is nearest
The Prismaflex control unit performs a test to determine if a Battery

backup is installed or not. If the systems runs on a 12V battery system
a periodic battery check executes. If battery is below specific battery
limit, the ADVISORY: Memory backup alarm is displayed with
the option to OVERRIDE.
The way that the Prismaflex control unit was turned off, determines
how the Prismaflex control unit will start. There are three different
screens that can be displayed:
- The regular Prismaflex System screen
- Query screen
- Alarm screen
If an alarm occurs,see Alarms and Troubleshooting chapter for
details on how to remedy the alarm.

Prime Self-test
The prime self-test consists of two phases of subtests:
• Pre-prime
• Post-prime
The pre-prime phase starts when the softkey NEW PATIENT or

SAME PATIENT is selected. The service technician manually starts the
post-prime phase of testing by pressing the PRIME + TEST softkey
in Verify Setup screen or the PRIME TEST softkey on the
Priming X of Y Cycles Complete screen. During the
testing process, if any subtest fails, an alarm occurs informing the
service technician about the specific failure and provides instructions.
Note: A congruency check on the system database is performed before

the Pre-Prime phase of the Prime Self-test.
Pre-Prime
The pre-prime phase includes ten subtests:
1. 24 V Battery Backup Test
2. Scale Zero Test
3. Pressure Zero Test
4. Line Presence Sensors of ABD and Return Line Clamp (Pre–Prime)
5. Scale Position Test
6. Pinch Valve Position Test
7. Effluent Line Check
8. Syringe Line Check
9. Positioning of Pinch Valves
10. Recognition Test
11. Syringe Pump
1. 24 V Battery-Up Test
Executes only when the Prismaflex control unit is equipped with
24V Battery Backup. The test is activated when the softkey
NEW PATIENT is selected. The protective system checks the limit
status of the voltage of the 24 V battery.
Alarm generated is;

ADVISORY: Battery Exhausted
Options:OVERRIDE

2. Scale Zero Test
The test is activated when the softkey NEW PATIENT or
SAME PATIENT is selected. The protective system acquires the A/D
conversion value for each scale from its scale board via the I2C bus.
The A/D values are then converted to weight using the protective
calibration data. The protective system verifies that the load on the
Effluent, Replacement, Dialysate and PBP scales are reading between
±30 g. This test verifies that the protective scale calibration is valid
for 0 grams weight.
Alarm generated is;

MALFUNCTION: Scale Zero Test
Option:RETEST
3. Pressure Zero Test

The test is activated when the softkey NEW PATIENT or
SAME PATIENT is selected. The protective system acquires the A/D
conversion value for each pressure reading from the ARPS via the I2C
bus. The A/D values are then converted to pressure using the protective
calibration data. The protective system verifies that the pressure on
the Access, Effluent, Filter and Return pressure sensors are reading
±15 mmHg. This test verifies that there is no external pressure on any
of the sensors and that the protective pressure calibration is valid for
atmospheric pressure.
Alarm generated is;

MALFUNCTION: Pressure Zero Test
Option: RETEST
4. Line Presence Sensors of ABD and Return Line Clamp

When the NEW PATIENT softkey is selected the Protective system
checks the status of the line presence switch in the ABD. The micro
switch must indicate that no line is present in the ABD. If a line is
present an alarm message will trigger.
The test occurs both before and after a set is loaded. Do not insert the
return line into the air detector before the set is loaded. After loading,
the return line should be present in the detector.
Alarms generated are

MALFUNCTION: Line in Air Detector
Options:RETEST, OVERRIDE
When the NEW PATIENT softkey is selected the Protective system

checks the status of the line presence switch the Return line clamp.
The micro switch must indicate that no line is present in the Return
line clamp. If a line is present an alarm message will trigger. The test
occurs both before and after a set is loaded. Do not insert the return
line into the clamp before the set is loaded. After loading, the return
line should be present in the clamp.
Alarms generated are;

MALFUNCTION: Line in Clamp
Options:RETEST, OVERRIDE

5. Scale Position Test
After the selection of the Therapy mode by the operator the protective
system monitors that the associated scale position sensors detect
movement. The sensors on the scales involved in the selected therapy
must change from closed to open. Then they must detect a change
from open to closed (solution bag loaded). Then the protective system
must detect a weight of higher than 100 grams on the scale. If this is
performed before the PRIME button is pressed, then the test passes.

WARNING: Bag Volume Incorrect
Options:KEEP BAG, CONTINUE
WARNING: Effluent Bag Incorrect
Options:MODIFY BAG, CONTINUE
MALFUNCTION: Scale Sensor
Options: RETEST, OVERRIDE
6. Pinch Valve Position Test

When pressing LOAD softkey, control system via the PIB board will
command the dialysate and replacement pinch valves to move to
neutral position. The protective system will then acquire position
signals from the PIB board via the I2C bus and monitor that the pinch
valves are in Neutral position.

WARNING:Loading Error
Due To: Wrong pinch valve position when pressing LOAD
Options:RETEST
7. Effluent Line Check

Protective system will check that effluent line is installed in the blood
leak detector.

WARNING: Effluent Line Not in BLD
Due To: Effluent line not installed in BLD when pressing LOAD
Options: RETEST, DISCONNECT
8. Syringe Line Check

During the priming of the calcium line, hence the user has chosen
Citrate – Calcium, Prismaflex syringe pump, a test will be performed,
checking that the correct line is used and that the dedicated calcium
line is not clamped. If any of these tests fail, one of the following
alarms will be triggered.

WARNING:Ca Line Not Connected
Options: CONTINUE, CHANGE SYR/LINE
WARNING:Calcium Line Clamped
Options: CONTINUE, CHANGE SYR/LINE
9. Positioning of Pinch Valves

After the set has been loaded the control system via the PIB board will
command the dialysate and replacement pinch valves to move through
all of their positions. The protective system will then acquire position

signals from the PIB board via the I2C bus and monitor that the pinch
valves are able to actuate through each of the three positions. The pinch
valves valve positions are detected with their associated optical sensors.
Upper Pinch Valve: The protective system commands the upper

(dialysate) pinch valve into the dialysate position, and its position is
verified by the position sensors.
The pinch valve is then commanded into the neutral position and is
again verified by the position sensors.
Finally the pinch valve is commanded into the replacement 2 position
and verified by the position sensors.
Lower Pinch Valve: The protective system commands the lower

(pre/post) pinch valve into the pre position, and its position is verified
by the position sensors.
The pinch valve is then commanded into the neutral position and is
again verified by the position sensors.
Finally the pinch valve is commanded into the post position and is
verified by the position sensors.

MALFUNCTION:Prime Self-Test
Code: 21
Due To: Upper pinch valve
Code: 22
Due To: Lower pinch valve
Code: 23
Due To: Upper and lower pinch valve
Options: RETEST, DISCONNECT, NEW SET
10. Recognition Test

The venous clamp closes. The upper pinch valve closes the Dialysate
line. The Prismaflex control unit measures for effluent, filter and
return reference pressures. The Dialysate pump runs for 4 s. The
Prismaflex control unit looks for pressure differences. In case of
unexpected change, “Warning: Set-up error” is triggered.
CRRT: The Prismaflex control unit looks for a pressure change of
more than 5 mmHg.

WARNING:Set-up error
Options: UNLOAD, RETEST
TPE, HP: As there is no dialysate line in this therapy, the

Prismaflex control unit looks for a pressure change of less than 5
mmHg.
The bar code is read at loading. If the identified bar code mode is
different than the selected one (TPE set for CRRT set for example),
then the alarm “Warning: Wrong set loaded” is triggered.

WARNING:Wrong set loaded
Option: UNLOAD

11. Syringe Pump
During the Syringe Installation the pump direction and speed
function is verified. The operator is prompted to activate the syringe
pump in the downward direction (by either pressing the auto down or
by pressing the hard-keys with a downwards arrow). The protective
system then acquires the encoder signals directly from the syringe
pump board and verifies the pump direction and rate. The operator is
prompted to activate the syringe pump in the upward direction. The
protective system then acquires the encoder signals directly from the
syringe pump board and verifies the pump direction and rate.
This must be completed within 6 minutes or the
alarm Malfunction: Syringe Pump Hardware is
generated.
Alarm generated is;

Code: 28
Due to: Syringe Pump Hardware
Options:RETEST, DISCONNECT

Post-Prime
Before Post prime tests are performed, a wrong set selected test is
done in case of bar code reading has failed: Low Flow (LF) and High
Flow (HF) set check. Mass variation (Δm) on each of the Effluent,
PBP, Dialysate and Replacement scale records are used to check for
LF set use instead of HF set, and vice versa. If bar code reading has
previously failed and the mass variation test fails, the alarm "Warning:
Wrong Set Selected" is triggered.
The Post-Prime tests are performed once the priming of the set occurs
and the service technician has pressed the PRIME TEST softkey on the
Priming X of X Cycles Complete screen.
The Post-Prime phase includes eleven subtests:

(Post-loading)
2. BLD Normalization
3. BLD Test
4. +12 V ARPS Pump
5. Air/Pump Security (ABD)
6. Pump Occlusivity Test
7. Return Pressure Sensor
8. +24 V and Return Clamp
9. Pressure Pods Reposition
10. TMPa Calibration (only performed in TPE)
11. Remote Alarm Test

(Post-loading)
When the set has been loaded the protective system checks the status
of the line presence switch in both the ABD and the Return line
clamp. The micro switches must indicate that a line is present on both
associated micro switch sensors.

MALFUNCTION:No Line in Air Detector
MALFUNCTION:No Line in Clamp
Options:RETEST, OVERRIDE, DISCONNECT
Note: If OVERRIDE is selected the Prismaflex control unit

is able to continue, but will display a Caution alarm ”Yellow
alarm light” throughout the treatment. An alarm message in the
Examine alarms screen will also be present.

2. BLD Normalization
Immediately after selecting the PRIME TEST softkey the Protective
system requests the PIB board to normalize the BLD.
The PIB adjusts the level of the BLD's transmitter IR LED between
transmitter PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) levels of 0% (transmitter
OFF) and 100% (transmitter full ON). It uses the bisection method
until the BLD IR receiver has reached a value of 43500 ±1280.
Then the PIB responds to the protective system the Normalization has
completed. The protective system checks that the transmitter PWM
level is lower than 45%, that the receiver value remains within 43500
±1500 and that the receiver value is below 3000 when the transmitter is
switched OFF.
If the PIB has not responded to the protective system that the
normalization has completed within 30 seconds or the values of the
receiver and transmitter PWM are determined to be out of range by the
protective system the test has failed. The protective system can request
the PIB to perform the Normalization three times before issuing an
alarm.
Alarm generated is;

Code: 17
Due To: Blood Leak Detector Normalization Time-out, Normalization
value 0
Options: RETEST, DISCONNECT, NEW SET, REPRIME
3. BLD Test
Two seconds after a successful BLD normalization the BLD test is
performed. The transmitter PWM is lowered to a level simulating a
blood leak. The receiver value must be reduced to a value below 15000
within 5 seconds, which is equal to the detection of a blood leak.
Alarm generated is;

Code: 18
Due To: Blood Leak Detector Threshold error
Options:RETEST, DISCONNECT, NEW SET, REPRIME

4. +12 V ARPS Pump
The Protective circuit board disables the 12 V relay that powers the
Automatic Repositioning system motor. Protective circuit board then
checks to see if the relay is disabled, and finally, re-enables the relay.
The protective system requests the control system to start turning
the ARPS air pump. The protective system verifies that there is no
leakage in the ARPS by looking for pressure changes in the ARPS. The
protective system then disables the 12 V relay and checks that ARPS
pump has stopped by monitoring the ARPS pressure and detects that
there is no change. Finally the protective system re-enables the 12 V
relay and checks that the ARPS pressure sensor value changes.
Alarm generated is;

Code: 24
Due To: 24 Volt / 12 Volt
5. Air/Pump Security (ABD)

Test verifies that the Control CCA activates a “safe state” wherein all
pumps are stopped and the Return clamp is closed when a simulated
air bubble is detected. The protective system commands the control
system to start the Blood pump and the four fluid pumps only when the
blood line in the Air Bubble Detector is filled with fluid.
An ABD alarm is simulated by reducing the ABD's transmitter power
to a level causing the receiver to detect an Air bubble.
The protective system must see that the:
• Air in blood hardware alarm signal is activated
• Blood pump stop hardware command is activated
• All the pumps have really stopped
The protective system then sends the commands START BP PUMP and
START FLUID PUMPS to the control system; all pumps must start.
The protective system then sends the commands STOP FLUID PUMPS
to the control system and checks that each fluid pump remain stopped
while the Blood pump is running.
The protective system then sends again the commands START BP
PUMP and START FLUID PUMPS to the control system and checks
that each pump run again.
The protective system then sends again the commands STOP BP
PUMP and STOP FLUID PUMPS to the control system and checks
that each pump remain stopped.
The protective system clears the ABD alarm signal.
The protective system checks that the trouble signal ABD has been
activated by the receiver hardware circuitry when the ABD transmitter
is first switched ON.
Alarm generated is;

Code: 19
Due To: Air/Pump Security Test

6. Pump Occlusivity Test
Tests whether the rollers of each peristaltic pump can completely
occlude the tubing within the pump raceway and for external leakage
in the Prismaflex disposable set (damaged component or setup error).
The protective system commands the control to stop all the pumps and
close the return line clamp. The protective system then commands the
blood pump to start turning until the return pressure reach a specific
pressure. The pressure is depending on the selected disposable set.
While the blood pump is turning, the protective system counts the
number of rotations required to achieve this pressure using the encoder.
The number of rotations must not be greater than a specific value
dependent on the selected disposable set.
The protective system reads the values of the filter, effluent and return
pressure sensors.
After waiting an additional 10 seconds the protective system again

reads the pressure values and compares them with the initial recorded
values.
Allowed pressure drop depends on selected disposable set.
Alarm generated is;

Code: 20
Due To: Pump Occlusivity Test
7. Return Pressure Sensor

Immediately after the Occlusivity test the return pressure will normally
be greater than 250 mmHg. The protective system commands the
control system to run the ARPS pump until the ARPS pressure sensor
is equal to that measured by Return pressure sensor.
The ARPS return valve is then opened and the pressure reading of the
Return and ARPS pressure sensors must be within ±20 mmHg.
Alarm generated is;

Code: 16
Due To: Return Pressure Sensor
Options: RETEST, DISCONNECT, NEW SET, REPRIME

8. +24 V and Return Clamp
First the protective system commands the control system to close the
Return clamp.
The protective system then disables the +24V relay in the Power supply
and confirms that no +24V is supplied to the Prismaflex control unit.
Next the protective system re-enables the +24V relay, confirms that the
+24V has been restored and checks that the Return clamp has remained
closed during the above operations.
The protective system finally commands the clamp to open and checks
that the position sensor, located in the clamp, has detected this correctly.

Code: 24
Code: 25
Due To: Return Clamp Sensor
Code: 26
Due To: 24 Volt and Return Clamp Sensor
9. Pressure Pods Reposition

Access, Filter and Effluent pressure pod sensors
During this test the pressure pods are repositioned and the sensors are
checked in the following sequence:
a. Effluent pressure sensor
b. Access pressure sensor
c. Filter pressure sensor
Repositioning using the First algorithm:
Effluent pressure pod/sensor: the initial pressure of the Effluent

pressure sensor is measured and stored. The ARPS pump is then
commanded to run until the ARPS pressure sensor is equal to the initial
effluent pressure value. A verification of the Effluent pressure sensor is
performed, it must be equal to the ARPS pressure sensor ±20 mmHg
for at least 2 seconds. The ARPS pump is then commanded to run for
a maximum of 3000 steps to decrease the Effluent pressure by 100
mmHg. After this the ARPS pump changes direction and re-introduces
approximately 1 ml of air (about ½ the working range of the pod).
The effluent valve is closed and the repositioning sequence of the

Access pressure pod/sensor is started.
Note: If during the repositioning sequence the effluent and ARPS

pressure sensor values differ by more than 20 mmHg for longer than 5
sec. the valve closes and the verification/repositioning has failed. The
repositioning of this pod/sensor is skipped and the protective system
will start the repositioning on the next pod/sensor.

Access pressure pod/sensor: the initial pressure of the Access pressure
sensor is measured and stored. The ARPS pump is then commanded
to run until the ARPS pressure sensor is equal to the initial access
pressure value.
A verification of the Access pressure sensor is performed it must be

equal to the ARPS pressure sensor ±20 mmHg for at least 2 seconds.
The ARPS pump is then commanded to run for a maximum of 3000

steps to decrease the access pressure by 100 mmHg. After this the
ARPS pump changes direction and re-introduces approximately 1 ml
of air (about ½ the working range of the pod).
The access valve is then closed and the repositioning sequence of the
Filter pressure pod/sensor is started.
Note: If during the repositioning sequence the access and ARPS

pressure sensor values differ by more than 20 mmHg for longer than 5
sec. the valve closes and the verification/repositioning has failed. The
repositioning of this pod/sensor is skipped and the protective system
will start the repositioning on the next pod/sensor.
Filter pressure pod/sensor: the initial pressure of the Filter pressure

sensor is measured and stored. The ARPS pump is then commanded
to run until the ARPS pressure sensor is equal to the initial filter
pressure value.
A verification of the Filter pressure sensor is performed; it must be

equal to the ARPS pressure sensor ±20 mmHg for at least 2 seconds.
The ARPS pump is then commanded to run for a maximum of 3000

steps to increase the filter pressure by 100 mmHg. After this the ARPS
pump changes direction and removes approximately 1 ml of air (about
½ the working range of the pod).
The Filter valve is then closed and the repositioning is complete.
Note: If during the repositioning sequence the filter and ARPS pressure
sensor values differ by more than 20 mmHg for longer than 5 sec.
the valve closes and the verification/repositioning has failed. The
repositioning of this pod/sensor is skipped.
After the command to close the filter valve, the protective system
waits 15 seconds before verifying that the Effluent, Access and Filter
pressure sensors are within ±50 mmHg of their initial stored values.
For any pressure sensor that has failed the first repositioning sequence
the protective system will command that a new repositioning sequence
using the second repositioning algorithm be performed.
Repositioning using the Second algorithm:
The valve of the pressure sensor to be repositioned is opened.
For the negative pressure pods (Effluent and Access) the ARPS pump
is commanded to run and remove air from the pod, pulling the pod
membrane towards the Prismaflex control unit until the protective

system detects a pressure change greater 10 mmHg/sec for 3 seconds
(it determines the plateau or end of travel for the pod membrane).
For the positive pod (Filter) the ARPS is commanded to pump air into
the pod, pushing the pod membrane away from the Prismaflex control
unit until the end of travel is detected.
The ARPS pump is then commanded by the protective system to run

for a maximum of 3000 steps in the opposite direction pumping air into
the pod (Effluent and Access) or removing air (Filter) while counting
the number of steps of the stepper motor. When a pressure change is
greater than 10 mmHg/sec, the end of travel of the pod membrane is
again detected and the ARPS pump stops. The protective system then
commands the ARPS pump to reverse direction again and run for half
the number of steps previously counted between the pod membrane's
ends of travel so placing the pod membrane in the middle of the pod
before closing the valve.
Note: If during the repositioning sequence the access and ARPS

pressure sensor values differ by more than 20 mmHg for longer than
5 sec. or the repositioning time-out has been reached >2 minutes
the valve closes and the verification/repositioning has failed. The
repositioning of this pod/sensor has failed. The protective system will
start the repositioning on the next pod/sensor.
Note: The Access pod is repositioned with the same process as the
Filter pod when the access pressure is positive.

Code: 1
Due To: Pressure Pod/Sensor - Access
Code: 2
Due To: Pressure Pod/Sensor - Filter
Code: 3
Due To: Pressure Pod/Sensor - Access and Filter
Code: 4
Due To: Pressure Pod/Sensor - Effluent
Code: 5
Due To: Pressure Pod/Sensor - Access and Effluent
Code: 6
Due To: Pressure Pod/Sensor - Filter and Effluent
Code: 7
Due To: Pressure Pod/Sensor - Access, Filter and Effluent
Options: RETEST, DISCONNECT, NEW TEST, REPRIME

10. TMPa Calibration (only performed in TPE)
Using the Automatic Repositioning system, pressurizes the Filter,
Effluent, and Return pressure sensors to various pressures, determines
if the sensor characteristics are within 20 percent of each other, then
returns the sensors to their initial pressures. Calculates initial TMPa
in less than four minutes.
Alarm generated is:

Code: 27
Due To: TMPa calibration failed
Options: RETEST, DISCONNECT, NEW TEST, REPRIME
11. Remote Alarm Test

This test occurs when the Prime Test Complete screen is
displayed. The protective system checks if it is able to generate
a signal to a remote alarm device by simulating an alarm. The
Prismaflex control unit will activate the red status light, and the remote
alarm device.
Note: This test is performed even if there is not remote alarm connected
to the Prismaflex control unit. The service technician is responsible to
confirm if the remote alarm has been activated.

Periodic Self-test
A periodic self-test is conducted by the control unit during Run mode.
A test is initiated at the following times:
• During patient treatment (Run mode): A periodic self-test is

conducted every two hours. The first periodic self-test starts 10
minutes after Run mode is entered. If another alarm occurs at
the scheduled start of a periodic self-test, the self-test may be
delayed up to 15 seconds. Periodic self-test may be delayed 10
min by selecting the DELAY TEST softkey. When the user has
initiated three delays of a due self-test the Advisory: Self-Test
Overdue alarm occurs. Time schedule of the periodic self-test may
also be automatically modified by the system according to next
intervention schedule (bag change or syringe empty).
• If needed, an ongoing self-test can be interrupted by pressing

the STOP softkey. Self-test is then restarted when pressing the
RESUME softkey in the Stop screen.
• Following an operator’s request (Run mode): A periodic self-test

is conducted by pressing the SELF-TEST softkey from the
System Tools screen.
Flow Rates can be read from the Flow settings field and Anticoagulation
field of the Status screen. History information can be read from the
History screen. A complete periodic self-test takes approximately
1 to 6 minutes. Once started, its progress is signalled to the operator
through messages on the Status screen. Certain functions, including
adjustments to treatment parameters, are unavailable during an ongoing
test and the related softkeys are gray. Any treatment interruptions via
the STOP softkey should be avoided during an ongoing test in order to
allow for its swift and successful completion.
Note: The information icon “i” on the Status screen is lit with an
orange color during self-test.
If any of the subtests fail, the ongoing run of the periodic self-test is
terminated and a Malfunction: Self-test Failure alarm occurs. The
alarm screen identifies the failed subtest and provides instructions for
the operator.
The following four Periodic self-tests are performed:
1. Blood Leak Detector Test
2. +24 V and Return Clamp Test
3. Return Pressure Sensor Test
4. Pressure Pod Repositioning

1. Blood Leak Detector Test
As soon as the Periodic self-test has started the Protective system
commands the PIB to start the BLD test. The transmitter PWM is
lowered to a level simulating a blood leak. The receiver value must
be reduced to a value below 15000 within 5 seconds, which is equal
to the detection of a blood leak.
Alarm generated is;

MALFUNCTION:Self-Test Failure
Code: 18
Due To: Blood leak detector threshold error
2. +24 V and Return Clamp Test

First the protective system commands the control system to close the
Return clamp. The protective system then disables the +24V relay
in the Power supply and confirms that no +24V is supplied to the
Prismaflex control unit. Next the protective system re-enables the
+24V relay, confirms that the +24V has been restored and checks that
the Return clamp has remained closed during the above operations.
The protective system finally commands the clamp to open and checks
that the position sensor in the clamp has detected this correctly.

Code: 24
Code: 25
Due To: Return clamp sensor
Code: 26
Due To: 24 V and Return Clamp sensor
3. Return Pressure Sensor Test

The protective system commands the control system to run the ARPS
pump until the ARPS pressure sensor is equal to that of the Return
pressure sensor. The ARPS return valve is then opened. The pressure
reading of the Return and ARPS pressure sensors must be within ±20
mmHg for each other.
Alarm generated is;

Code: 16
Due To: Return pressor sensor
4. Pressure Pod Repositioning

For repositioning of the pressure pods and the alarms generated,
see Post-Prime, subtest 9.

Alarm Monitoring During the Periodic Self-Test
During the Periodic self-test some alarms are affected and they are
managed in different ways depending on the subtest in progress. In
the table below, the affected alarms are divided in Temporary limits
and Disabled. Return pressure sensor is not affected during Periodic
Self-test.
Subtest Alarm Name Temporary Limit Disabled

Access Access extremely negative 100 mmHg below
Pressure (Monitored for negative operator-set limit
Sensor pressure blood source only.)
Access extremely positive 100 mmHg above
(Monitored for positive pressure operator-set limit
blood source only.)
Check access X
Filter Filter extremely positive Disabled during
Pressure pressure sensor test
Sensor
Set disconnection Disabled during filter
repositioning
Filter clotted X
Plasmafilter clotted (TPE) X
TMP excessive (CRRT) X
TMPa excessive (TPE) 100 mmHg above TMPa limit
computed according to Blood
Flow rate setting
Effluent Filter clotted X
Pressure
Sensor
Plasmafilter clotted (TPE) X
TMP excessive (CRRT) X
TMPa excessive (TPE) 100 mmHg above TMPa limit
computed according to Blood
Flow rate setting

Technical Screens
The Technical Screens display technical data related to the current
status of the control unit. Status information about pumps, scales,
pressures, ABD, ARPS, Pinch Valves, Power Supply, Loader, bag tare
data, installed software version and language package can be found.
Also the barcode can be found in these screens. Press the date on the
top right corner of any screen to access the Technical Screens. Use the
UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to navigate.
First Technical Screen
Parameter Description
PBP. TACH. Value, in rpm, of the PBP Pump speed read by the Protective side
EFFL. TACH. Value, in rpm, of the Effluent Pump speed read by the Protective side
DIAL. TACH. Value, in rpm, of the Dialysate Pump speed read by the Protective
side
REPL.TACH. Value, in rpm, of the Replacement Pump speed read by the
Protective side
BLOOD.TACH. Value, in rpm, of the Blood Pump speed read by Protective side
PBP. SET. Value, in rpm, of the PBP Pump speed set by the Control side
EFFL. SET. Value, in rpm, of the Effluent Pump speed set by the Control side
DIAL. SET. Value, in rpm, of the Dialysate Pump speed set by the Control side
REPL.SET. Value, in rpm, of the Replacement Pump speed set by the Control
side
BLOOD.SET. Value, in rpm, of the Blood Pump speed set by the Control side
PBP. MOTOR. PBP Pump Motor status. Possible values displayed are:
Enable/Disable

EFFL. MOTOR. Effluent Pump Motor status. Possible values displayed are:
Enable/Disable
DIAL. MOTOR. Dialysate Pump Motor status. Possible values displayed are:
Enable/Disable
REPL. MOTOR. Replacement Pump Motor status. Possible values displayed are:
Enable/Disable
BLOOD. MOTOR. Blood Pump Motor status. Possible values displayed are:
Enable/Disable
PBP. DIR. PBP Pump running direction. Possible values displayed are:
CW (clockwise)/CCW (counterclockwise)
EFFL. DIR. Effluent Pump running direction. Possible values displayed are:
DIAL. DIR. Dialysate Pump running direction. Possible values displayed are:
REPL. DIR. Replacement Pump running direction. Possible values displayed
are: CW (clockwise)/CCW (counterclockwise)
BLOOD. DIR. Blood Pump running direction. Possible values displayed are:
PBP. SENS. A. Number of pulses accumulated for the hall sensor A of the PBP
Pump
EFFL. SENS. A. Number of pulses accumulated for the hall sensor A of the Effluent
Pump
DIAL. SENS. A. Number of pulses accumulated for the hall sensor A of the Dialysate
Pump
REPL. SENS. A. Number of pulses accumulated for the hall sensor B of the
Replacement Pump
BLOOD. SENS. A. Number of pulses accumulated for the hall sensor B of the Blood
Pump
PBP. SENS. B. Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the PBP Pump
rotor) closes the circuit of the sensor A and the time in which the
magnet closes the circuit of the sensor B
EFFL. SENS. B. Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the Effluent Pump
DIAL. SENS. B. Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the Dialysate Pump
REPL. SENS. B. Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the Replacement
Pump rotor) closes the circuit of the sensor A and the time in which
the magnet closes the circuit of the sensor B
BLOOD. SENS. B. Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the Blood Pump

PBP. T. AB Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the PBP Pump
EFFL. T. AB Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the Effluent Pump
DIAL. T. AB Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the Dialysate Pump
REPL. T. AB Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the Replacement
Pump rotor) closes the circuit of the sensor A and the time in which
the magnet closes the circuit of the sensor B
BLOOD. T. AB Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the Blood Pump
PBP. T. BA Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the PBP Pump
rotor) closes the circuit of the sensor B and the time in which the
magnet closes the circuit of the sensor A
EFFL.T. BA Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the Effluent Pump
DIAL. T. BA Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the Dialysate Pump
REPL. T. BA Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the Replacement
Pump rotor) closes the circuit of the sensor B and the time in which
the magnet closes the circuit of the sensor A
BLOOD. T. BA. Delay between the time in which the magnet (on the Blood Pump
PBP. BRAKE. Not used
EFFL. BRAKE. Not used
DIAL. BRAKE. Not used
REPL.BRAKE. Not used
BLOOD.BRAKE. Status of the break on the Blood Pump. Possible values displayed
are: Enabled/Disabled
PBP. AL. S. A Not used
EFFL. AL. S. A Not used
DIAL. AL. S. A Not used
REPL. AL. S. A Not used
BLOOD. AL. S. A Not used

PBP. AL. S. B Not used
EFFL. AL. S. B Not used
DIAL. AL. S. B Not used
REPL. AL. S. B Not used
BLOOD. AL. S. B Not used
PBP. ENCODER. Not used
EFFL ENCODER. Not used
DIAL ENCODER. Not used
REPL. ENCODER. Not used
BLOOD. ENCODER. Value, in rpm, of the Blood Pump speed read by Control side
SC. PBP. CTR AD PBP scale A/D value read by the Control side
SC. EFF. CTR AD Effluent scale A/D value read by the Control side
SC. DIA. CTR AD Dialysate scale A/D value read by the Control side
SC. REP. CTR AD Replacement scale A/D value read by the Control side
SC. PBP. PRT AD PBP scale A/D value read by the Protective side
SC. EFF. PRT AD Effluent scale A/D value read by the Protective side
SC. DIA. PRT AD Dialysate scale A/D value read by the Protective side
SC. REP. PRT AD Replacement scale A/D value read by the Protective side
SC. PBP. REFAD1. PBP scale A/D reference 1 value (1st A/D channel)
SC. EFF. REFAD1. Effluent scale A/D reference 1 value (1st A/D channel)
SC. DIA. REFAD1 Dialysate scale A/D reference 1 value (1st A/D channel)
SC. REP. REFAD1 Replacement scale A/D reference 1 value (1st A/D channel)
SC. PBP. REFAD2. PBP scale A/D reference 2 value (2nd A/D channel)
SC. EFF. REFAD2. Effluent scale A/D reference 2 value (2nd A/D channel)
SC. DIA. REFAD2. Dialysate scale A/D reference 2 value (2nd A/D channel)
SC. REP. REFAD2. Replacement scale A/D reference 2 value (2nd A/D channel)
SC. PBP. CTR GR Weight in grams, on the PBP scale, read by the Control side
SC. EFF. CTR GR Weight in grams, on the Effluent scale, read by the Control side
SC. DIA. CTR GR Weight in grams, on the Dialysate scale, read by the Control side
SC. REP. CTR GR Weight in grams, on the Replacement scale, read by the Control side
SC. PBP. PRT GR Weight in grams, on the PBP scale, read by the Protective side
SC. EFF. PRT GR Weight in grams, on the Effluent scale, read by the Protective side

SC. DIA. PRT GR Weight in grams, on the Dialysate scale, read by the Protective side
SC. REP. PRT GR Weight in grams, on the Replacement scale, read by the Protective
side
SC. PBP. SWITCH. Status of the PBP scale switch (scale open/scale close) Possible
values displayed are: Open/Closed
SC. EFF. SWITCH. Status of the Effluent scale switch (scale open/scale close) Possible
SC. DIA. SWITCH. Status of the Dialysate scale switch (scale open/scale close) Possible
SC. REP. SWITCH. Status of the Replacement scale switch (scale open/scale close).
Possible values displayed are: Open/Closed
SC. PBP. DIGFIL Not used
SC. EFF. DIGFIL Not used
SC. DIA. DIGFIL Not used
SC. REP. DIGFIL Not used
SC. PBP. OFFSET. Not used
SC. EFF. OFFSET. Not used
SC. DIA. OFFSET. Not used
SC. REP. OFFSET. Not used
SC. PBP. CTR ERR Remaining summed scale error after calibration in grams
SC. EFF. CTR ERR Remaining summed scale error after calibration in grams
SC. DIA. CTR ERR Remaining summed scale error after calibration in grams
SC. REP. CTR ERR Remaining summed scale error after calibration in grams
SC. PBP. PRT ERR Remaining summed scale error after calibration in grams
SC. EFF. PRT ERR Remaining summed scale error after calibration in grams
SC. DIA. PRT ERR Remaining summed scale error after calibration in grams
SC. REP. PRT ERR Remaining summed scale error after calibration in grams

Second Technical Screen
ACC. AD VAL Access pressure A/D value acquired by the transducer
FIL. AD VAL Filter pressure A/D value acquired by the transducer
EFF. AD VAL Effluent pressure A/D value acquired by the transducer
5TH. AD VAL 5th Pod pressure A/D value acquired by the transducer
ARPS. AD VAL Circuit pressure A/D value acquired by the ARPS
RET. AD VAL Return pressure A/D value acquired by the transducer
ACC. PRES. Access pressure value read by the Protective side
FIL. PRES. Filter pressure value read by the Protective side

EFF. PRES. Effluent pressure value read by the Protective side
5TH. PRES. 5th Pod pressure value read by the Protective side
ARPS. PRES. ARPS circuit pressure read by the Protective side
RET. PRES. Return pressure value read by the Protective side
ACC. VALVE. Access valve status. Possible values displayed are:
Open/Closed
FIL. VALVE. Filter valve status. Possible values displayed are: Open/Closed
EFF. VALVE. Effluent valve status. Possible values displayed are:

Open/Closed
5TH. VALVE. 5th Pod valve status. Possible values displayed are:
Open/Closed
ARPS. VALVE. Not currently used
RET. VALVE. Return valve status. Possible values displayed are:
Open/Closed

ARPS. SET. Not used.
ARPS. DIGFIL. Not used.
ARPS. MOTOR. ARPS Motor status. Possible values displayed are:
Running, Not running
ARPS. DIR. ARPS Direction (Decrease = the motor runs in clockwise
direction/Increase = the motor runs in counterclockwise direction)
Possible values displayed are: Decrease, Increase
ARPS. REFAD1. ARPS A/D reference 1 value read by the Protective side
ABD. LINE. Presence of line in the ABD. Possible values displayed are:
Line Detected/Not detected
ABD. TROUB. Malfunction detected in the ABD circuit. Possible values displayed
are: ON/OFF
ABD. MAC.B. Macro Bubble detected by the ABD. Possible values displayed are:
ON/OFF
ABD. APSTOP. Not used
H.PUMP. MANUAL. Activation of the Manual mode of the Syringe Pump. Possible values
displayed are: Enabled/Disabled
H.PUMP. AUTOM. Activation of the Automatic mode of the Syringe Pump. Possible
values displayed are: Enabled/Disabled
H.PUMP SET. Syringe Pump rate set

H.PUMP F. AD A/D value of the load applied to the syringe plunger clamp read by
the Syringe Pump
H.PUMP F.N Load applied to the syringe plunger clamp in Newtons (N)
H.PUMP UEOS. Upper End of stroke of the syringe plunger clamp reached. Possible
values displayed are: OFF/ON
H.PUMP LEOS. Lower End of stroke of the syringe plunger clamp reached. Possible
values displayed are: OFF/ON
H.PUMP OVRLD. Overload condition of the Syringe Pump. Possible values displayed
are: OFF/ON
H.PUMP ABSTH. Threshold of the absolute overload of the Syringe Pump expressed
in Newton
H.PUMP SLOPE. Absolute slope threshold of the Syringe Pump expressed in N/mm
H.PUMP DIR. Not used
H.PUMP POS. The position of the carrier, measured from the lower end position,
expressed in mm.
H. SYR. STATUS. Status of the syringe. Possible values displayed are:
Loaded/Not loaded
H. SYR. THRLD Threshold for the detection of a syringe loaded
H. SYR. COUNT. Counter of the encoder pulses received at the selection of the Syringe
control panel UP button when the Syringe Pump is in Manual mode
H. SYR. RAMP. Not used

H. SYR. UP. BUT. Status of the UP button on the Syringe control panel. Possible values
displayed are: Pressed/Released
H. SYR. DN. BUT. Status of the DOWN button on the Syringe control panel. Possible
values displayed are: Pressed/Released

Third Technical Screen
CLAMP. POS. Return clamp status. Possible values displayed are:
Open/Closed
PIN.PP POS. Lower pinch valve position. Possible values displayed are:
Pre/Neutral/Post/Undefined
PIN.DP POS. Upper pinch valve position. Possible values displayed are:
Pre/Neutral/Post/Undefined
CLAMP. CL.COM. Comment sent by the Control side to the Return clamp. Possible
PIN.PP CL.COM. Not used
PIN.DP CL.COM. Not used
CLAMP. LINE. Line presence in the Return line clamp. Possible values displayed
are: Line Detected/Not detected
PIN.PP LINE. Not used
PIN.DP LINE. Not used.
BLD. TX.ON BLD A/D value read when the transmitter is ON
BLD. TX.OFF BLD A/D value read when the transmitter is OFF
BLD. PWM. PWM value

BLD. STAT. Status of the BLD normalization procedure
Possible values displayed are:
Bg.Norm
M.pwm.BLD
Ms.BLD
VrA.regst
W.A.regDn
C.pwmVal
Tst.W.stop
Test ok
Test Fail
VOLTAGE CT24V Status of the +24V relay in the Power supply (Enabling/Disabling
done by the Control side). Possible values displayed are: OFF/ON
VOLTAGE PT24V Status of the +24V relay in the Power supply (Enabling/Disabling
done by the Protective side). Possible values displayed are:
OFF/ON
VOLTAGE 24V +24V voltage value. Value in VDC
VOLTAGE 5Vp 5Vp voltage value. Value in VDC
VOLTAGE 5Vd 5Vd voltage value. Value in VDC
VOLTAGE 12V +12V voltage value. Value in VDC
VOLTAGE –5V 5V voltage value. Value in VDC
BACKUP Indicates if Battery backup is installed. Possible values displayed

are: Installed/Not Installed
LOADER. MOTOR. Status of the motor of the Prismaflex disposable set loader. Possible
values displayed are: Enable/Disable
REM.OUT MOTOR. Not used
EXT.I2C MOTOR. Not used
PCMCIA. MOTOR. Not used
LOADER. DIR. Not used
REM.OUT DIR. Not used
EXT.I2C DIR. Not used
PCMCIA. DIR. Not used
LOADER. SWITCH. Status of the switch of the Prismaflex disposable set loader. Possible
values displayed are: Loaded / Not Loaded

REM.OUT SWITCH. Not used
EXT.I2C SWITCH. Not used
PCMCIA. SWITCH. Not used
LOADER. STAT. Not used
REM.OUT STAT. Status of the remote alarm output. Possible values displayed
are: Enabled/Disabled
EXT.I2C STAT. Not used
PCMCIA. STAT. Not used

Fourth Technical Screen
Tare method Empty Bag Method set in Custom mode. Possible values displayed
are: variable/fixed
Meas_tare weight Measured tare weight in grams.
Tare weight Tare weight in grams as calculated/established by Protective.
Tare min Minimum tare in grams as calculated/established by Protective.
Tare max Maximum tare in grams as calculated/established by Protective.
Bag volume Allowed bag volume in ml as set in Custom mode or from Change
Bags or Change Bags/Containers screen.
Bag weight Bag weight in grams as measured by Protective at last tare
calculation.
Change bag min Minimum weight in grams for a new bag.
Change bag max Maximum weight in grams for a new bag.
Tare time Date and time for last tare calculation.

Fifth Technical Screen
SWVERS. CONTROL. Software version of the Control System.
SWVERS. PLD. Software version of the PLD Board
SWVERS. CH.PRO. Software version of the Carrier Board
SWVERS. PROT. Software version of the Protective Board
SWVERS. P.INF. Not used
SWVERS. BLOOD. Old Pump: Not currently used. New Pump: Software version of
the Blood Pump
SWVERS. SCALE. Not used
SWVERS. ARPS. Software version of the ARPS Board
SWVERS. PIB. Software version of the PIB Board
SWVERS. LOADER. Not used

SWVERS. HEPAR. Software version of the syringe pump
SWVERS. PSB Software version of the Power Supervision Board
Language Displays installed language and language package version. Default
settings are: English, Default Language.

Sixth Technical Screen
Bar code
The bar code contains information about the setup and configuration of
the machine, such as hardware/software configuration and calibration
parameters.
The bar code gives valuable information for troubleshooting and

complaint handling.
Photograph the bar code

Use a digital camera to be able to take a photograph of the bar code
and send it to Gambro. Take the photograph straight from the front. It
is important there are no reflections caused by the flash or other light
near the display.


Chapter 5
Alarms and Troubleshooting

Contents
About this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2

Warning Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Prismaflex® Control Unit Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Operator Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Overridden Warning Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4
Malfunction Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:5
Overridden Malfunction Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:6
Caution Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:7
Advisory Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8
Overridden Advisory Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8
Alarm Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:9
Alarm Priority List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:9
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:14
About the Troubleshooting Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:14
Warning Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:15
Caution Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:39
Advisory Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:48
Malfunction Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:66
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:97
Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:101
G5005209 Alarms and Troubleshooting 5:1

About this chapter
This chapter describes the different alarms that can occur and how
so solve them.
The Prismaflex control unit continually monitors itself and the

Prismaflex disposable set for proper functioning during operation.
If an abnormal situation occurs, the control unit signals a Warning,
Malfunction, Caution, or Advisory alarm.
The operator is notified of an alarm condition via a red or yellow status

light, an audible alarm, and an alarm screen on the display. Each alarm
screen provides instructions on how to respond to the alarm. Press the
MUTE softkey to temporarily silence the audible alarm (for 2 minutes).
When applicable, a Help screen is available to provide additional

information.
Some of the alarms are possible to override. Press

EXAMINE ALARMS to see the complete list.
Note: EXAMINE ALARMS softkey is placed in the

Modify Settings screen in Run mode.
WARNING
When responding to any alarm, carefully follow the instructions on
the displayed alarm screen and its associated Help screen.
To clear some alarms, the Prismaflex control unit must override the
alarm for a brief time (60 seconds). The alarm screen notifies the
operator that the alarm will be overridden if the OVERRIDE softkey
is pressed. A new alarm for the same condition cannot occur during
the override period. Therefore, carefully observe the set and all
operation during the override period. If the alarm condition is still
present after the override period, the Prismaflex control unit issues
a new alarm.
Do not override the same alarm repeatedly. End treatment and

call for service.
If power is lost to the Prismaflex control unit, the patient can be

manually disconnected from the set. If performing a Manual
Termination With Blood Return, visually check for air in the blood
return line until the patient is disconnected.
The Prismaflex control unit may not be able to detect disconnections

of the set from the patient’s catheter. Carefully observe the set and
all operation while using the Prismaflex system.
WARNING
5:2 Alarms and Troubleshooting G5005209

Warning Alarms
Warning alarms occur if conditions of possible patient hazard exist that
require prompt operator intervention; for example, air bubbles in the
return line or extreme positive pressure in the return line.
Prismaflex® Control Unit Actions

The following actions occur during a Warning alarm:
• The Prismaflex control unit enters a “safe state” by stopping all

pumps and closing the return line clamp. Treatment is suspended.
The patient’s blood does not circulate through the blood flowpath.
• Red flashing light.
• Recurring high sound, 10 sound pulses repeated approx. every 8

seconds until muted.
• Warning screen appears on the display.
Operator Response
The Warning screen gives the operator instructions for responding
to the Warning alarm. Appropriate responses are different for each
warning.
When the alarm has been cleared, the following occurs:
• Warning screen leaves the display.
• Green light is lit.
• EXAMINE ALARMS softkey disappears, unless there are other

active alarms.
• Blood pump restarts and return line clamp opens. Seven seconds
later, other pumps restart.

Overridden Warning Alarms
To clear some Warning alarms, the Prismaflex control unit must
override the alarm for a short period of time. After completing the
response instructions given on the Warning screen, the operator presses
the OVERRIDE softkey. During the override period, the following
occurs:
• Warning screen leaves the display.
• Yellow constant light.
• EXAMINE ALARMS softkey remains displayed.
When the override period is complete, the alarm either clears or recurs.

Malfunction Alarms
Malfunction alarms occur if patient safety cannot be monitored due to
a failure of the system; for example, failure during self-tests, errors in
the software, or hardware failure.

The following actions occur during a Malfunction alarm:
• The Prismaflex control unit enters a “safe state” by stopping all

pumps and closing the return line clamp. Treatment is suspended.
The patient’s blood does not circulate through the blood flowpath.
• Red flashing light.
• Recurring high sound, 10 sound pulses repeated approx. every 8

• Malfunction screen appears on the display.
Operator Response
Some malfunctions can be cleared by the operator; others require
service by an authorized service technician. The Malfunction
screen gives instructions for responding to the Malfunction alarm.
Appropriate responses are different for each malfunction.
• Malfunction screen leaves the display.

active alarms.
If the operator cannot clear a particular Malfunction alarm, it must

be cleared in Service mode by an authorized service technician. The
Malfunction screen gives appropriate instructions.

Overridden Malfunction Alarms
To clear some Malfunction alarms, the Prismaflex control unit must
override the alarm for a brief time. After completing the response
instructions given on the Malfunction screen, the operator presses the
OVERRIDE softkey. During the override period, the following occurs:
• Malfunction screen leaves the display.
When the override period is complete, the alarm either clears or recurs.

Caution Alarms
Caution alarms occur if a condition exists for which the proper action
is to suspend treatment, but it is safe to continue blood and syringe
pump flow; for example, the PBP, dialysate or replacement solution
bag is empty or the effluent bag is full.

The following actions occur during a Caution alarm:
• PBP, replacement, dialysate, and effluent pumps stop.
• Blood and syringe pumps continue to operate and the return line
clamp remains open. The patient’s blood continues to circulate
through the blood flowpath, but treatment is suspended.
• Yellow flashing light.
• Recurring medium sound, 3 sound pulses repeated approx. every

11 seconds until muted.
• Caution screen appears on the display.
Operator Response
The Caution screen gives the operator instructions for responding to the
Caution alarm. Appropriate responses are different for each caution.
• Caution screen leaves the display.

active alarms.
• PBP, replacement, dialysate, and effluent pumps restart within

a few seconds.

Advisory Alarms
Advisory alarms occur if a condition exists of which the operator
should be aware, but the patient is not at immediate risk. The patient’s
treatment continues during an Advisory alarm.

The following actions occur during an Advisory alarm:
• No pumps stop; treatment continues.
• Recurring low sound, 2 sound pulses repeated approx. every 21

• Advisory screen appears on the display.
Operator Response
The Advisory screen gives the operator instructions for responding
to the Advisory alarm; appropriate responses are different for each
advisory.
When an advisory has been cleared (self-cleared or cleared by the

operator), the following occurs:
• Advisory screen leaves the display.

active alarms.
Overridden Advisory Alarms

Many Advisory alarms can be overridden by the operator. If an
Advisory alarm is overridden, it remains overridden indefinitely. If the
overridden alarm is a self-clearing alarm, it clears when the condition
no longer exists. If the overridden alarm is not selfclearing, it remains
in a list of pending alarms. Pending alarms can be viewed by pressing
the EXAMINE ALARMS softkey. See “Alarm Priorities” on page 5:9
for more information.
If the operator overrides an Advisory alarm, the following control unit

actions occur:
• Advisory screen leaves the display.
• Yellow light remains illuminated.

Alarm Priorities
All alarms are prioritized. This means that if multiple problems exist,
only the highest-priority alarm screen is displayed. Clearing the
highest-priority alarm causes the second highest-priority alarm screen
to be displayed, and so on. As each alarm appears on the display, the
operator follows the instructions on the screen in order to respond to
the alarm.
The priority for each alarm is shown in the Alarm Priority List.
Whenever an alarm occurs, the EXAMINE ALARMS softkey appears

and the name of the alarm is stored in a pending (active) alarms list.
Until the alarm is cleared, the EXAMINE ALARMS softkey remains
displayed and the alarm name remains in the pending alarms list.
Overridden alarms are considered active alarms.
Note: EXAMINE ALARMS softkey is placed in the

Modify Settings screen in Run mode.
The operator can press EXAMINE ALARMS to view the list of pending
alarms.
Alarm Priority List

Priority Alarm Title
Malfunctions (High Priority)
1 General System Failure

2 Communication Error
3 Memory Error
4 Pressures Circuit Board
5 Voltage Out of Range
Warnings
6 Air in Blood
7 Return Disconnection
8 Return Pressure Dropping
9 Set Disconnection
10 Filter Clotted
11 Plasmafilter Clotted
12 HP Cartridge Clotted
13 Blood Leak Detected
14 Access Extremely Negative
15 Return Extremely Positive

Warnings
16 Access Extremely Positive

17 Filter Extremely Positive
18 Power Failure
19 Wrong Set Loaded
20 Effluent Bag Full
21 Bag/Container Empty
22 Bag Volume Incorrect
23 Effluent Bag Incorrect
24 Scale Open
25 Clamped Lines
26 Syringe Line Clamped
27 Syringe Empty
28 Calcium Syringe Empty
29 Calcium Line Clamped
30 Ca Line Not Connected
31 Recirculation Time Exceeded
33 Set-up Error
34 Wrong Set Selected
35 Crossed Lines
36 Clamped Lines
37 Wrong Set Loaded
38 Loading Error
39 Battery Low
40 Unsuitable Ca Solution
41 Effluent Line Not in BLD

Malfunctions
42 Air Detector
43 Clamp Stuck Closed
44 Blood Pump
45 Effluent Pump
46 Replacement Pump
47 Dialysate Pump
48 Replacement 2 Pump
49 PBP Pump
50 Normalization Failed
51 Blood Leak Detector
52 Self-Test Failure
53 Prime Self-Test
54 Syringe Pump
55 Scales
56 Pressure Zero Test
57 Scale Zero Test
58 Checksum Interrupted
59 Custom Data
60 Library Data
61 Cannot Save Custom Data
62 Memory Error
63 Upper Pinch Valve
64 Lower Pinch Valve
65 Scales Circuit Board
66 Effluent Scale Sensor
67 Replacement Scale Sensor
68 Dialysate Scale Sensor
69 PBP Scale Sensor
70 Syringe Not Loaded / Ca Syringe Not Loaded
71 Line in Air Detector
72 Line in Clamp
73 No Line in Air Detector
74 No Line in Clamp
75 Memory Error, code 7
76 Auto Blood Return

Caution
77 Loss Limit Reached/Gain Limit Reached

78 Unresolved Flow Problems
79 Flow Problem
80 TPE Prescription Delivered
82 Bag Empty
83 TMP Excessive
84 TMPa Excessive
85 Bag Volume Incorrect
86 Effluent Bag Incorrect
87 Scale Open
88 Patient Fluid Gain Excessive
89 Anticoagulation Suspended

Advisory
90 Check Access
91 Check Return
92 Blood Flow Stopped
93 Syringe not loaded / Ca Syringe Not Loaded
94 Fluid Pumps Stopped
95 Check Syringe Line
96 Syringe Empty
97 Syringe Line Clamped
98 Calcium Syringe Empty
99 Syringe Almost Empty / Ca Syringe Almost Empty
100 Calcium Line Clamped
101 Ca Line Not Connected
102 Filter is Clotting
103 Plasmafilter is Clotting
104 HP Cartridge is Clotting
105 TMP Too High
106 TMPa Too High
107 Time to Change Set
108 Cannot Detect Return
109 Download Interrupted

110 Anticoagulation Checkpoints
111 Self-Test Overdue
112 Memory Backup
113 MARS Treatment
114 Battery Exhausted
115 Main Power Lost
116 Incomplete Bolus

Troubleshooting
About the Troubleshooting Chapter

The alarm screens give online instructions for responding to most
alarm situations. Under certain circumstances, however, the alarm
screens cannot give the necessary detailed instructions. This chapter of
the manual provides the additional information that may be needed.

Warning Alarms
Access Extremely Negative
Observation:
Alarm occurs if the access pressure is more negative than the user-controllable
“Access Extremely Negative” Warning Limit. or if access pressure is 150 mmHg or
more below its operating point.
Note: An operating point is the pressure value when the pressure is considered stable
after an event such as an alarm, change of blood flow, etc.
This alarm self-clears if pressure goes back to normal limits within 15 secondsc.
During the self-clear time the monitor will not give an audible alarm.
Possible cause(s): Operator action(s):
Patient is moving, coughing, or Wait 15 seconds for self-clearingc attempt.

being suctioned. Note: If a self-clear attempt fails wait
until the pressure is back to normal in
the non self-clearing screen, then press
CONTINUEa.
Access line clamped, kinked or Note: If a self-clear attempt fails, wait

partially blocked. until the pressure is back to normal in
CONTINUEa.
Access catheter clotted or out of Flush/reposition access catheter per

position in vein, or blood flow rate hospital protocol. Use access sample
too high for the access device. site to infuse saline to release negative
pressure and/or lower blood flow rate.
Press CONTINUEa.
Access pressure sensor failed. End treatment, call service.
Note: If the above operator responses do

not clear the alarm, the set can be changed
and the alarm cleared via STOPb. If alarm
recurs with a new set, end treatment via
STOPb. Call service.
Possible cause(s): Service Technician action(s):
Blood flow rate too high for the Check Access pressure in Diagnose Screen
access device. – Pressure Pod Reposition on page 6:30.
If pressure deviation in diagnose, see next
Service action.

If pressure is correct, check Blood pump
flowrate in Service Diagnose, Diagnose
Screen – Pumps Diagnose on page 6:26.
If value is incorrect, replace the Blood
pump.
Access pressure measurement Check the function of the pressure

failure. sensors in Diagnose Screen – Pressure
Note: Self-test interruption as a Pod Reposition on page 6:30. Check
common root cause. the pressure sensors and pressure ARPS
circuit for leakage.
If leakage is detected, remedy the pressure
pod sealing cones, pressure sensors,
pressure valves, ARPS pump alt ARPS
circuit.
Service action.
Access pressure sensor failed. Perform a calibration, see Calibration

Screen – Pressure Sensors Calibration on
page 6:64. Check the pressure in Diagnose
Screen – Pressure Pod Reposition on page
6:30.
If pressure deviation, replace the pressure
sensor.
Access Extremely Positive
Observation:
Alarm occurs if the access pressure is more positive than the user-controllable
“Access Extremely Positive” Warning Limit.
External device (if in use) is Reduce the delivery pressure of the

delivering blood at a too high external device.
pressure.
Blood flow rate has been set too Increase blood flow rate. Return to alarm
low according to the blood pressure screen and press CONTINUE.
delivered by the external device.
Access pressure sensor failed. End treatment. Call service.

Note: If the above operator responses do not clear the alarm, the set can be changed
and the alarm cleared via STOPb. If alarm recurs with a new set, end treatment via
STOPb. Call service.

Access pressure measurement Perform a self-test to reposition the
failure. pressure pod membranes. Clear
the alarm to reach Status screen. Press
SYSTEM TOOLS and perform SELF-TEST.
If the problem persists, change set via
STOPb. If alarm recurs with new set, end
treatment via STOP. Call service.
Blood flow rate too low for the Check Access pressure in Diagnose Screen
external device. – Pressure Pod Reposition on page 6:30.
pump. If value is correct, continue with
pressure sensors.
Access pressure measurement Check the function of the pressure

failure. sensors Diagnose Screen – Pressure Pod
Note: Self-test interruption as a Reposition on page 6:30. If the values
common root cause. are incorrect, perform a calibration, see
Calibration Screen – Pressure Sensors
Calibration on page 6:64. Check the
pressure in Diagnose Screen – Pressure
Pod Reposition on page 6:30.
If the values are incorrect, replace the
pressure sensors(s).
Access pressure sensor failed. Perform a calibration, see Calibration

6:30.
sensor.
Air in Blood
Disconnected line, leaking Check blood access and set for possible
connection, set not fully primed, leakage or disconnection.
return line not installed in air Remedy possible causes.
detector.
Press Up arrow until return pressure is
NEGATIVE. If unsuccessful, proceed with
manual procedure.

Press RELEASE CLAMP to remove air
and draw blood from patient into the return
line / deaeration chamber.
If needed, use arrows to adjust the level of
fluid in the chamber.
When ready, press CONTINUE.
Note: If air is present in entire set, press
DISCONNECT to load and prime a new
set.
Air/foam in the tubing. In case of recurring alarm, open door

of air bubble detector and look for air/
foam in the tubing; inspect level of fluid
in deaeration chamber. Close air bubble
detector door. Press CONTINUE.
Bag/Container Empty
Observation:
This alarm appears during priming only.
Identified solution bag is emptyd. Connect a new bag. Press CONTINUE.
Identified solution bag is partially Remove partial support. Press

supported (not hanging freely). CONTINUE.
Bag Volume Incorrect
Observation:
Valid only if Variable Empty Bag method is selected.
Amount of fluid in the identified Choose one of the three options on the
solution bag does not match the alarm screen.
current Allowed Volume. Caution:
Choose KEEP BAG only to use a partially
full bag that is of the same total volume
capacity as the current Allowed Volume.
No bag on scale. Place the appropriate bag on the scale.

Press CONTINUE.

Note: If hanging multiple bags on the scale, the total fluid capacity of all bags on the
scale must not exceed the allowed volume for that scale.
Foreign object on scale. Remove foreign object. Press CONTINUE.

Battery Low
Observation:
Main power is still out and batteries are out of energy.
Applicable when machine configuration includes the back-up battery (check with the
local representative for more information). See Power Failure on page 5:101
Main power has been lost and If patient is in treatment, press

battery is out of energy. STOP softkey to end treatment.
If a patient is connected in SETUP mode,
press DISCONNECT softkey to disconnect
the patient. Switch off the machine.
If a patient is connected in END mode,
press OVERRIDE softkey to end the
treatment. Switch off the machine.
Machine is unplugged and battery Connect power cord. Press STOP and
is out of energy. select RESUME to restart the treatment.
Blood Leak Detected
Air bubble in effluent line at level Press OVERRIDEa to dislodge bubble. In

of blood leak detector. case of recurring air bubbles (effluent fluid
degassing), check for kink in effluent line
and/or reduce ultrafiltration rate.
Effluent line not properly installed Press line into detector from the bottom up
in blood leak detector. and route securely through tubing guides.
Press OVERRIDEa. After alarm clears,
press Normalize BLD in System Tools
screen and follow instructions.

Warning:
The blood leak detector must be
re-normalized if the effluent line is
removed and then reinserted into the blood
leak detector after treatment (Run mode)
has started.
Liquid or debris in tubing path Remove line from detector. Using a

through the detector. “flossing” action, clean inside the detector
with a lint-free cloth and isopropyl alcohol.
Dry thoroughly. Clean effluent line with
water and dry thoroughly. Reinsert line
into detector and tubing guides. Press
OVERRIDEa. After alarm clears, press
Normalize BLD in System Tools screen
and follow instructions.
Warning:
has started.
Leak in filter membrane. Change the set via STOPb. Send sample of
the effluent to blood lab for a cell count.
TPE: Formed elements or lipids in Press OVERRIDEa. Lower replacement

plasma, discolored plasma. rate and/or patient plasma loss rate.
Note: If this does not clear the alarm, the
set can be changed via STOPb. If alarm
recurs with a new set and lowered flow
rates, discontinue treatment.
Calcium Line Clamped
The calcium infusion line is Unclamp the calcium infusion line. Press
clamped. CONTINUE.
Incorrect installation of calcium Inspect calcium infusion line, remove any

infusion line. clamps, kinks or other obstructions. Use
the clip above the syringe pump for the
calcium infusion line to avoid kinks. Press
CONTINUE.
Note: In case of recurring alarm, press
CHANGE SYR/LINE softkey to change
both the syringe and the calcium infusion
line.

Calcium Syringe Empty
Observation:
Calcium syringe is empty. Press CHANGE SYR/LINE softkey and

follow the instructions on the screen to
install a full syringe and return to alarm
screen. Press CONTINUE.
Ca Line Not Connected
The calcium infusion line is not Connect a dedicated calcium infusion line
connected to the syringe. to the syringe. Press CONTINUE.
Wrong line connected. Use only a dedicated infusion line for

the calcium infusion when the “Citrate
– Calcium, Prismaflex Syringe Pump”
method is chosen.
The unused and stowed syringe line Clamp the unused line on the disposable set
on the disposable set is connected and leave it unused during entire treatment
to the calcium syringe. when “Citrate – Calcium, Prismaflex
Syringe Pump” method is chosen. Press
CHANGE SYR/LINE softkey and follow
the instructions on the screen to connect
a dedicated calcium infusion line to the
syringe.
A syringe of the wrong size is Use only a 50 ml syringe of the allowed

installed. brand when the “Citrate – Calcium,
Prismaflex Syringe Pump” method is
chosen.
Air in syringe. Press CHANGE SYR/LINE. Follow

instructions to install a full syringe and
return to alarm screen. Press CONTINUE.

Clamped Lines
One of the lines is clamped. Unclamp the line. Press REPRIME.
Occluded disposable set. Press DISCONNECT. Change set.
One or more pressures sensors Press DISCONNECT. Call service.

failed.
One or more pressures sensors If the alarm correspond to the Access or

failed. Return line, check the pressure sensors
in Diagnose Screen – Pressure Pod
Reposition on page 6:30. If pressure
deviation, perform a calibration, see
Calibration on page 6:64. Check the
pressure in Diagnose Screen – Pressure
Pod Reposition on page 6:30. If the
values are incorrect, replace the pressure
sensor(s).
If the alarm regards one of the bag lines,
check corresponding scale; see Service
action for the scale “Weight” alarm
(Caution), observation Incorrect Weight
Change.
Crossed Lines
The lines are crossed or tangled. Check and correct lines and bags setup.
Press REPRIME.
Foreign object on scale. Remove the object. Press REPRIME.
One or more scales failed. Press DISCONNECT, turn off the machine.
Call service.
One or more scales failed. Check the function of the scales in

Diagnose Screen – Scale Diagnose on

page 6:28. If needed, calibrate the scales,
see Calibration Screen – Scales Calibration
on page 6:61. Run the Prismaflex control
unit again, perform a new Prime.
If the alarm recurs, replace the scale(s).
Effluent Bag Full
Observation:
Effluent bag is full. Connect a new effluent bag via instructions

on the alarm screen. Press CONTINUE.
Foreign object on effluent scale. Remove foreign object. Press CONTINUE.
Effluent Bag Incorrect
Observation:
Effluent Bag volume does not match Allowed Volume.
Cause: a 5000 ml empty bag is hung on scale while Effluent Allowed Volume is
9000 ml.
A 5000 ml empty bag is hung on Replace the 5000 ml bag hung on the
the scale while Effluent Allowed scale with a 9000 ml bag or change the
Volume is 9000 ml. Effluent Allowed Volume by pressing
MODIFY BAG. Press CONTINUE.

Press CONTINUE.
Effluent bag is partially supported Remove partial support. Press

(not hanging freely). CONTINUE.

Effluent Line Not in BLD
Effluent line of new set is not Remedy and press RETEST. If alarm
installed in blood leak detector. recurs, press DISCONNECT and load a
new set. If alarm recurs with a new set,
call for service.
Blood leak detector failed. Press DISCONNECT, remove set. Call

service.
Line in blood leak detector is not Remedy and press RETEST.

empty.
Blood leak detector failed. Check the function of the Blood leak
detector in Diagnose Screen – BLD (Blood
Leak Detector) on page 6:43.
If malfunction, replace the Blood leak
detector.
Filter Clotted
Observation:
Filter pressure drop exceeds limit for the filter in use, or both the “Filter is Clotting”
Advisory and the “TMP Excessive” Caution limits are reached.
Note: TMP value in the MARSFLUX filter is not considered for this alarm during
CRRT MARS therapy; see section “Pressure management” in Prismaflex Operator´s
manual.
Clots have formed in the filter. Change the set via STOPb. Test
Note: Clotting is usually due to patient’s clotting parameters and adjust
inadequate anticoagulation of the anticoagulant delivery if needed.
blood flowpath.
Clamped line(s) in blood flowpath. Unclamp lines. Press CONTINUE.
Ultrafiltration rate is too high for Press CONTINUE and then reduce
filter in use. replacement solution flow rate and/or PBP
solution flow rate and/or patient fluid
removal rate.

Pressure measurement failure. Perform a self-test to reposition the
pressure pod membranes.
During ”Systemic, Press STOPb and change the set. Ensure

Prismaflex syringe pump” that syringe is properly installed in syringe
anticoagulation: pump and plunger is moving upward
Anticoagulation delivery has failed. during treatment. If plunger is not moving,
syringe pump has failed. If desired,
connect syringe line to a medically
acceptable alternate anticoagulant delivery
system. Call service to repair pump.
During "Citrate - Calcium" Press STOPb and change the set. Ensure
anticoagulation: that PBP pump works properly. If PBP
Citrate delivery has failed. pump has failed, call service.
During CRRT MARS treatment: If blood leak confirmed, press STOP and
The MARS monitor has detected change the set. If not, troubleshoot the
a blood leak. MARS monitor and press CONTINUE.
Anticoagulation delivery has failed. Perform a diagnose test of the syringe

pump, see Diagnose Screen – Syringe
Pump on page 6:36.
If diagnose test fails, replace the syringe
pump.
PBP pump failure. Perform a diagnose test of the PBP pump,

see Diagnose Screen – Pumps Diagnose
on page 6:26.
If diagnose test fails, replace the PBP
pump.
Filter Extremely Positive
Observation:
Alarm occurs if filter pod pressure is ≥450 mmHg.
Line between filter pressure pod Remedy and press CONTINUE.

and filter or line between filter and
deaeration chamber is clamped or
kinked.

Machine is operating at high return Press FLOW SETTINGS and lower blood
pressure and clotting has begun in flow rate. Check catheter.
filter.
Excessive pressure. Relieve excess pressure in return line

by pressing RELEASE CLAMP. If
desired, lower the blood flow rate, press
CONTINUE.
Note 1: The RELEASE CLAMP key is available only if no other alarm requiring the
clamp closed is presente.
The filter pressure will drop as operation commences. (The appropriate Advisory or
Warning alarm occurs when filter clotting becomes problematic.)
Note 2: If the above operator responses do not clear this alarm, the set can be changed
via STOPb. If alarm recurs with new set, end treatment via STOPb. Call service.
Filter pressure sensor failed. End treatment via STOPb. Call service.
The MARS monitor has detected change the set. If not, troubleshoot the
a blood leak. MARS monitor and press CONTINUE.
Filter pressure measurement Check the function of the pressure sensors

failure. in Diagnose Screen – Pressure Pod
Reposition on page 6:30.
Service action.
Filter pressure sensor failed. Perform a calibration, see Calibration

6:30.
sensor.

HP Cartridge Clotted
Observation:
Filter pressure drop exceeds limit for the HP cartridge in use.
Clots have formed in the HP Change the set via STOPb. Test
cartridge. patient’s clotting parameters and adjust
Note: Clotting is usually due to anticoagulant delivery if needed.
inadequate anticoagulation of the
blood flowpath.
During ”Systemic, Press STOPb and change the set. Ensure



Pump on page 6:36.
If diagnose test fails, replace the syringe
pump.
Loading Error
Observation:
Not possible to load/unload the set.
Pinch valves position not correct. Press RETEST to reposition the pinch
valves and clear the alarm.

Plasmafilter Clotted
Observation:
Filter pressure drop exceeds limit for the plasmafilter in use, or both the “Plasmafilter
is Clotting” Advisory and the “TMPa Excessive” Caution limits are reached.
Clots have formed in the Change the set via STOPb. Test
plasmafilter. patient’s clotting parameters and adjust
Note: Clotting is usually due to anticoagulant delivery if needed.
inadequate anticoagulation of the
blood flowpath.
Ultrafiltration rate is too high for Press CONTINUE and then reduce
filter in use. replacement solution flow rate and/or
patient plasma loss rate.

During “Systemic, Press STOPb and change the set. Ensure

During "Citrate - Calcium" Press STOPb and change the set. Ensure
anticoagulation: that PBP pump works properly. If PBP
Citrate delivery has failed. pump has failed, call service.

Pump on page 6:36.
If alarm recurs, replace the syringe pump.
PBP pump failure. Perform a diagnose test of the PBP pump,

see Diagnose Screen – Pumps Diagnose
on page 6:26.
If diagnose test fails, replace the PBP
pump.

Power Failure
Observation:
Power lost for more than 15 seconds after machine entered Run mode.
Main power failure; machine Inspect blood flowpath. If clotted, change

suddenly unplugged. the set via STOPb.
If flowpath is not clotted, press
CONTINUE. (Clears alarm and restarts
treatment at same place as when power
was lost.)
Note: If set was manually unloaded during
power loss, either:
continue treatment with a new set by
pressing STOPb, then CHANGE SET, or
end the treatment by pressing STOPb, then
END TREATMENT.
Recirculation Time Exceeded
Recirculation Time has exceeded Press STOP RECIRC. and resume the
the manufacturer-set limit. treatment.
Return Disconnection
Observation:
Alarm occurs if return pressure is lower than +10 mmHg and the return pressure
operating point is higher than +10 mmHg. The alarm reoccurs if the following return
pressure operating point is lower than +10 mmHg.
Alarm also occurs once if the operating point is lower than +10 mmHg after an
operator induced (re)start of the blood pump. Should this pressure condition persist,
it will be indicated by subsequent Advisory Cannot Detect Return alarms.
Note: An operating point is the pressure value when the pressure is considered stable
after an event such as an alarm, change of blood flow, etc.
Return line or catheter is Make sure return catheter is securely

disconnected. connected to both the return line and the
patient.
To resume treatment, press CONTINUEa.

Chamber monitor line not properly Press STOPb and use CHANGE SET to
connected to return pressure port or load/prime a new set. If fluid barrier
fluid barrier wet. wetting recurs call service.
Blood flowpath obstructed before Remedy, if possible. Press CONTINUE.

deaeration chamber. If not possible, press STOPb and use
CHANGE SET to load/prime a new set.
Return pressure sensor failed. End treatment via STOPb. Call service.
Fluid barrier wet with new set. Check the pressure sensors and the
pressure ARPS circuit for leakage
Reposition on page 6:30. If leakage is
detected, remedy the pressure sensor,
circuit.
Service action.
Return pressure sensor failed. Perform a calibration, see Calibration

6:30.
sensor.
Return Extremely Positive
Observation:
Alarm occurs if return pressure is more positive than the user-controllable “Return
Extremely Positive” Warning Limit.
This alarm self-clears if pressure goes back to normal limits within the self-clear time
and the monitor will not give an audible alarm.
Patient is moving, coughing, or Wait 15 seconds for self-clearingc attempt.

being suctioned. Note: If a self-clear attempt fails wait
until the pressure is back to normal in
CONTINUEa.
Return line clamped or kinked. Remedy, and wait for self-clearing attempt

Note: If a self-clear attempt fails, wait until the pressure is back to normal in the non
self-clearing screen, then press RELEASE CLAMP and then CONTINUEa.
Return catheter clotted or out of Flush/reposition return catheter per

position in vein, or blood flow rate hospital protocol and/or lower the blood
too high. flow rate. Relieve excess pressure in
return line by pressing RELEASE CLAMP.
Press CONTINUE.
Note: The RELEASE CLAMP is only
available if there is no other alarm
requiring clamp closed.
Return pressure sensor failed. End treatment, call service.

If the above operations do not clear the
alarm, the set can be changed and the
alarm cleared via STOPb. If alarms recur
with a new set, end treatment via STOPb.
Call service.
Return Pressure Dropping
Observation:
This alarm occurs if return pressure is 50 mmHg or 70 mmHg (with blood
flow>200ml/min) below its operating point.
Possible leakage or disconnection Make sure return catheter is securely

of return line or catheter. connected to both the return line and the
patient.
To resume treatment, press CONTINUEg
Patient is moving or being moved. Press CONTINUEg.
Blood flowpath obstructed or Remedy, if possible. Press CONTINUE.

leaking before deaeration chamber. If not possible, press STOPb and use
The hydrophobic membrane is wet, Press STOPb and use CHANGE SET to
and/or service line is disconnected. load/prime a new set. If fluid barrier gets
wet again with a new set, call service.
The MARS monitor has detected change the set. If blood leak not confirmed,
a blood leak. troubleshoot the MARS monitor and press
CONTINUE.

Fluid barrier wet with new set. Check the pressure sensors and the
pressure ARPS circuit for leakage
Reposition on page 6:30. If leakage is
detected, remedy the pressure sensor,
circuit.
Service action.
Return pressure sensor failed. Perform a calibration, see Calibration

6:30.
sensor.
Scale Open
Observation:
Impeding object blocking scale Inspect and remedy possible causes. Press
from fully closing, bag improperly scale toward machine until it locks into
positioned on hooks, carrying bar closed position. Press CONTINUE.
not centred on bar tray or handle
not rotated down (toward floor).
Scale sensor failed. Press DISCONNECT. Call service.
Scale sensor failed. Check the function of the scale sensor

in Diagnose Screen – Scale Diagnose on
page 6:28.
If scale sensor test fails, replace the scale.

Set Disconnection
Observation:
Alarm occurs if filter pressure is lower than +10 mmHg and the filter pressure
operating point is higher than +10 mmHg.
Filter pressure pod not installed or Clean pod from debris and reinstall pod
debris in sensor housing. as applicable. Press OVERRIDE to clear
alarm and perform self-test through
SYSTEM TOOLS as to reposition pod
membrane. If the pod problem recurs,
press STOP to change the set. If alarm
recurs with new set, end treatment and call
service.
Line between blood pump and filter Make sure the line is securely connected.
is disconnected. To resume treatment, press OVERRIDEa.
Blood flowpath is obstructed before Remedy, if possible. Press OVERRIDEa

filter pressure pod. If not possible, press STOP b and
pressCHANGE SET to load/prime a new
set.
Blood flow rate too low for the Increase the blood flow rate and press
access device. OVERRIDEa.
Filter pressure sensor failed. End treatment via STOPb. Call service.
Return line disconnection and Check return line and catheter; remedy
failure of return pressure alarm. as applicable. If fluid barrier wet,
press STOP and press CHANGE SET to
load/prime a new set.
If fluid barrier is not wet, press
OVERRIDEa to clear alarm and to reach
Status screen. Press SYSTEM TOOLS and
perform self-test in order to check return
pressure sensor.

pressure pod membranes. Clear
the alarm to reach Status screen. Press
SYSTEM TOOLS and perform SELF-TEST.
If the problem persists, change set via
STOPb. If alarm recurs with new set, end
treatment via STOP. Call service.

Filter pressure measurement Check the function of the pressure sensors

failure. in Diagnose Screen – Pressure Pod
If pressure deviation in diagnose, go to
service action for Filter pressure sensor
failed.
Blood flow rate too low for the Check Filter pressure in Diagnose Screen
access device. – Pressure Pod Reposition on page 6:30.
If pressure deviation in diagnose, check
the pressure sensors and pressure ARPS
circuit for leakage in Diagnose Screen –
Pressure Pod Reposition on page 6:30.
If leakage is detected, remedy the pressure
pod sealing cones, the pressure sensor,
circuit.
pump.
Filter pressure sensor failed. Perform a calibration, see Calibration

6:30.
sensor.
Set-up Error
Observation:
Alarm occurs if pre-prime self-test fails.
Set-up is incorrect. Check Return line in clamp. Press

RELEASE CLAMP to reposition. Reinstall
the return line in clamp.
Check chamber monitor line installation,
Filter and Effluent pods installation, clamp
on dialysate line.
Check that the pressure sensors has not
failed.
Check that the dialysate pump segment is
loaded.

Check that the syringe line and/or one-way
valve are connected.
Check that the syringe line is clamped.
Check that the right set is loaded. (see
HELP)
Remedy and press RETEST.
If alarm still recurs, press UNLOAD and
load a new set.
If alarm recurs with a new set, call service.
Set-up is incorrect. Check the function of the Return, Filter

and Effluent pressure sensors in Diagnose
Screen – Pressure Pod Reposition on
page 6:30. If pressure deviation, perform
calibration, see Calibration Screen –
Pressure Sensors Calibration on page
6:64alt replace the pressure sensors.
Check the function of the Dialysate pump
in Diagnose Screen – Pumps Diagnose on
page 6:26.
If pump malfunction, replace pump.
Perform a “Verification of slave pump
rotor” test, see point 5 in Component
Replacement on page 6:17.
Syringe Empty
Syringe is empty. Press CHANGE SYRINGE, follow

Note: A full syringe is required during
priming. If anticoagulation of blood
flowpath is not desired, syringe should be
filled with sterile saline solution.
Syringe Line Clamped
Syringe line clamped, kinked or Inspect syringe line; remove any clamps,
obstructed. kinks or other obstruction. Press
CONTINUEa.

Incorrect installation of syringe line Reinstall syringe line. Press CONTINUEa.
Alam is recurring. Press CHANGE SYRINGE; follow

instructions to change the syringe and
return to alarm screen. Then press
CONTINUE.
Unsuitable Ca solution
Observation:
Alarm occurs after Confirm Loaded Set screen if no valid set of initial
flow settings with reasonable operating ranges is available when using the selected
calcium solution. See the chapter about anticoagulation in Operators manual. Alarm
screen indicates if selected calcium solution is too diluted or too concentrated.
The calcium solution selected in Press MODIFY SOLUTION. Use arrows

custom mode is not suitable for to select another calcium solution. Press
use with the selected therapy or set CONTINUE. The CONTINUE button
type. will only be available if suitable calcium
solution is selected.
Alarm is recurring; no suitable Press UNLOAD to load a different set

calcium solution is available. type. Consult physician.
Wrong Set Loaded
Observation:
This set cannot be used with the therapy selected.
Failure of recognition test. Check that the set matches the selected
therapy.
Verify physician prescription for the
therapy and set.
Press UNLOAD to access the
Load Set Screen.
If needed, press CANCEL on the
Load Set Screen, select the
prescribed therapy, then load the
prescribed set.
If needed, remove the set attached to the
control unit (wrong set), then load the
prescribed set.
Note: If alarm occurs repeatedly, do not
use the machine until repairs are made.

Failure of recognition test. Check that right therapy is unlocked

according to the set and to the agreement
with the customer. If the alarm occurs
repeatedly, check that the Bar code reader
is correctly installed and connected to the
PC 104 board.
Wrong Set Selected
Mix up of high flow and low flow If loaded set does match set identified on
set after Bar Code Reading Failure. screen, press CONFIRM. Otherwise, press
At the end of the first priming DISCONNECT and reload set.
cycle in case of “Bar code reading
failure”, the operator has to
verify that the loaded set and the
prescribed set are the same, by
pressing CONFIRM.
Foreign object on scale. If loaded set does match set identified on

screen, press CONFIRM. Otherwise, press
DISCONNECT and reload set.
Return line not connected to If loaded set does match set identified on
effluent bag or effluent bag cock screen, press CONFIRM. Otherwise, press
opened. DISCONNECT and reload set.
Scale failed. Press DISCONNECT, remove set. Call

service.
Scale failed. Check the function of the scale in Diagnose

Screen – Scale Diagnose on page 6:28. If
needed, calibrate the scale, see Calibration
Screen – Scales Calibration on page 6:61.
Run the Prismaflex control unit again,
perform a new Prime.
If the alarm recurs, replace the scale.

Footnotes
a. OVERRIDE briefly overrides the alarm. Monitor closely.
b. STOP stops all pumps, clears the alarm and displays the Stop screen. The
following options are available: resume treatment, change set, end treatment and
recirculate.
c. A self-clearing attempt is started if the pressure has returned to normal limits
within 15 seconds and there are no other active Warning or Malfunction alarms. If
self-clear is unsuccessful, return line clamp closes and blood pump stops. In that
case the alarm must be manually cleared by the operator. During the self-clearing
period there will be no audible signal. Both for Access and for Return pressure
alarms, self-clearing can start only if another self-clearing procedure has not been
performed in the last 2 minutes.
d. This alarm occurs when the registered weight is less than the tare of the bag. The
tare of each bag is automatically calculated by the control unit depending on the
Empty Bag Method setting in Custom mode. If Empty Bag method is set to “Fixed”,
the tare of the Dialysate/Replacement2, PBP and Replacement bag is set to a fixed
value (default: 230 g). If Variable Empty Bag method is selected, the tare of the
Dialysate/Replacement2, PBP and Replacement bag is automatically calculated
each time a new bag is loaded.
e. If the RELEASE CLAMP softkey is not available and opening of the return
clamp is not considered a risk, open the return line clamp using the STOP and
RESUME softkeys. If opening of the return clamp is considered a risk, insert a
21-gauge needle with syringe into the upper red sample site closest to the filter pod to
aspirate air/blood until the filter pressure reaches a value lower than 450 mmHg.
f. If the RELEASE CLAMP softkey is not available and opening of the return
clamp is not considered a risk, open the return line clamp using the STOP and
RESUME softkeys. If opening of the return clamp is considered a risk, insert a
21-gauge needle with syringe into the blue sample site (return line) to aspirate
air/blood until the return pressure reaches a value lower than the alarm limit setting.
g. CONTINUE resets all operating points and clears the alarm.

Caution Alarms
Anticoagulation Suspended
Observation:
Citrate infusion is stopped because calcium infusion has been interrupted for too
long. Citrate – Calcium anticoagulation is suspended. This alarms self-clears once
anticoagulation is resumed.
Calcium syringe empty or not Press OVERRIDE and remedy underlying

loaded, Calcium line clamped or cause to prevent clotting in the set.
not connected, fluid pumps stopped.
Note: Calcium infusion requires additional

monitoring of patient's parameters. Check
prescription.
Bag Empty
Bag as indicated on screen is empty. Connect a new bag (see instructions on

alarm screen). If Variable Empty Bag
method is set in Custom mode, it is
possible to change to a larger/smaller bag,
by pressing MODIFY BAG and using
arrows to set a new Allowed Volume.
Press CONTINUE when ready.
Bag partially supported (not Remove partial support, press

hanging freely). CONTINUE.
Bag has fallen down. Connect a new bag (follow on-screen

instructions). Press CONTINUE when
ready.

Bag Volume Incorrect
Observation:
Variable Empty Bag method is selected, and amount of fluid in bag does not match
Allowed Volume.
Amount of fluid in the identified Choose one of the options on the alarm
solution bag does not match the screen.
current Allowed Volume.
Caution:
Choose KEEP BAG only to use a partially full bag that is of the same total volume
capacity as the current Allowed Volume.

Press CONTINUE.
Foreign object on scale. Remove foreign object. Press CONTINUE.

Effluent Bag Full
Effluent bag is full. Connect a new effluent bag (see

instructions on alarm screen). If
changing to a larger/smaller bag, press
MODIFY BAG and use arrows to set a new
Allowed Volume. Press CONTINUE.
Foreign object on effluent scale. Remove foreign object. Press CONTINUE.

Effluent Bag Incorrect
Observation:
Effluent Bag volume does not match expected volume.
A 5000 ml empty bag is hung on Replace the 5000 ml bag hung on the
the scale while Effluent Allowed scale with a 9000 ml bag or change the
Volume is 9000 ml. Effluent Allowed Volume by pressing
MODIFY BAG. Press CONTINUE.

Press CONTINUE.
Note: If hanging multiple bags on the scale, the total fluid capacity of all bags on the
scale must not exceed the allowed volume for that scale.
Effluent bag is partially supported Remove partial support. Press

(not hanging freely). CONTINUE.
Flow Problem
Observation:
Flow problem detected with fluid indicated on screenc.
Closed clamp or major leak on line Remedy and press CONTINUE.

or bag, bag is swinging, kinked
line.
Effluent drain port not fully closed. Remedy and press CONTINUE.
Bag connector not firmly tightened, Make sure the Luer connector is firmely
if bag connected through Luer. tightened.
Foreign object on scale, bag is Remove object or partial support. Press

partially supported (not hanging CONTINUE.
freely).
Incorrect puncture of the bag, if Using aseptic technique to make sure that
bag connected through spike. the solution bag is correctly punctured.

Incorrect use of the frangible pin, if Break the frangible pin correctly. Press
required for the particular bag. CONTINUE. If the problem persists,
replace the solution bag using the
CHANGE BAGS procedure.
Second compartment of bag not Press CONTINUE and immediately

opened, if double compartment bag replace the bag using the
in use. CHANGE BAGS procedure. Closely
monitor the deaeration chamber level since
residual air from the fluid line might reach
the blood flowpath.
Air bubbles in the solution bag or Check bag connections. Remedy and press
line. CONTINUE.
Air bubbles in the effluent fluid. Check effluent line for kink between pod
and pump. Remedy and press CONTINUE.
Non breathing spike used with a Replace the non breathing spike with a
rigid container. breathing spike. Press CONTINUE.
Line connected to wrong bag or Make sure that the line is connected to the
bag on wrong scale. correct bag. Color-coding of line must
match color of used scale.
Non-occlusive pump or scale Press STOP and end the treatment. Call
failure. service.
Environment with vibrations. If the source of vibrations cannot

be stopped, press STOP and end the
treatment. Call service.
Non occlusive Dialysate pump. Perform a “Verification of slave pump

rotor” test, see point 5 inComponent
Replacement on page 6:17. Check the
pump speed in Diagnose Screen – Pumps
Diagnose on page 6:26.
If deviation, replace the Dialysate pump.
Dialysate scale failed. Check the function of the scale in Diagnose

Screen – Scale Diagnose on page 6:28. If
needed, calibrate the scale, see Calibration
Screen – Scales Calibration on page 6:61.
Run the Prismaflex control unit again,
perform a new Prime.
If the alarm recurs, replace the scale.

Environment with vibrations. Check that the environment is according
to the specifications.
Gain Limit Reached
Observation:
The Unintended Patient Fluid Gain exceeded the selected limit and the treatment was
therefore permanently suspended for safety reasons. Fluid pumps are stopped and
will not re-start; the blood pump continues to run.
A flow problem has caused the Press STOP and end the treatment. If
Prismaflex control unit to infuse indicated, restart treatment with a new set.
excess fluid to the patient: Use HISTORY to verify exact fluid
Repeated flow obstructions due to exchange status at STOP time.
closed clamps or kinked lines;
Flow errors due to incorrect use of
the acccess port on the effluent bag.
Loss Limit Reached
Observation:
The Unintended Patient Fluid Loss exceeded the selected limit and the treatment was
therefore permanently suspended for safety reasons. Fluid pumps are stopped and
will not re-start; the blood pump continues to run.
A flow problem has caused the Press STOP and end the treatment. If
Prismaflex control unit to pull indicated, restart treatment with a new set.
excess fluid from the patient: Use HISTORY to verify exact fluid
Repeated flow obstructions due to exchange status at STOP time.
closed clamps or kinked lines;
Flow errors due to incorrect use of
the access port on a solution bag
(PBP, dialysate, replacement);
Flow errors due to effluent fluid
degassing.

Patient Fluid Gain Excessive
PBP fluid input has reached the Stop PBP infusion and continue therapy
maximum allowed Patient Fluid without further patient fluid gain: Press
Gain for the therapy/set. FLOW SETTINGS, set PBP rate to zero.
Continue therapy with further fluid gain for
the patient: Press CONTINUE. Alarm will
recur when Patient Fluid Gain increases
10% beyond the maximum allowed value.
End treatment: Press STOPb.
Replacement Container Empty
Replacement container is empty. Connect a new replacement container.

Press REPLACEMENT softkey, use arrows
to enter a new container volume. Press
CONTINUE.
Replacement container partially Remove partial support, press

Replacement container has fallen Connect a new replacement container

down. (see instructions on alarm screen). Press
CONTINUE when ready.
Scale Open
Observation:
Scale not properly closed.
Impeding object blocking scale Inspect and remedy possible causes. Press
from fully closing, bag improperly scale toward machine until it locks into
positioned on hooks, carrying bar closed position. Press CONTINUE.
not centred on bar tray or handle
not rotated down (toward floor).
Scale sensor failed. Press STOPand end treatment. Call

serviceb.

Scale sensor failed. Check the function of the scale sensor

page 6:28.
TMPa Excessive
Observation:
Access transmembrane pressure exceeds the safe limit.
Effluent rate is too high. Too much Decrease the replacement fluid or increase
plasma is being removed. blood flow rate. Return to alarm screen,
(Effluent rate = patient plasma loss press CONTINUE.
rate + replacement fluid rate)
Plasmafilter pressure drop is Decrease blood flow rate and/or adjust

increasing, possibly due to anticoagulation prescription.
insufficient anticoagulation.
TMP Excessive
Observation:
Transmembrane pressure exceeds membrane pressure limit.
Ultrafiltration rate (UFR) is too Decrease the PBP, replacement and/or

high. Too much fluid is being patient fluid removal rates or, alternatively,
removed. (UFR = patient fluid increase blood flow rate. Return to alarm
removal rate + replacement solution screen, press CONTINUE.
rate + PBP rate)
Wrong measurement of filter and Clear the alarm by temporarily decreasing

effluent pressure. UFR. Press SYSTEM TOOLS from Status
screen and perform a self-test. Set
previous flow rates back. If alarm recurs
decrease UFR or change the set.
Inadequate anticoagulation of the Press STOP and change the set or test
extra corporeal circuit. patient’s clotting parameters and adjust
anticoagulant delivery if needed.
Note: Filter Clotted warning occurs when
the blood in the filter is clotted.

During CRRT MARS treatment: Decrease replacement and/or patient
MARSFLUX filter and diaFLUX fluid removal and/or PBP rates. Press
filter combined transmembrane CONTINUE.
pressure exceeds membrane
pressure limit.
TPE Prescription Delivered
Observation:
Prescribed Total Replacement Volume has been delivered.
Total Replacement Input has been To continue treatment until remaining

achieved. replacement fluid is used, press
CONTINUE. When Replacement
Container Empty caution occurs, press
STOP and End treatment.
To set new TPE Prescription
Delivered alarm point, press
FLOW SETTINGS, then increase
the Total Replacement Input on the
Enter TPE Prescription s-
creen.
Unresolved Flow Problems
Observation:
Too many attempts to remedy Caution: Flow Problem alarms. Accuracy of patient
fluid removal may be compromised.
Clearing attempts have exceeded Press STOP and end the treatment. If
the manufacturer-set limit of 10 indicated, restart treatment with a new set.
tries in 3 hours. Use HISTORY to verify exact fluid
exchange status at STOP time.

Footnotes
a. This alarm occurs when the registered weight is less than the tare of the bag.
The tare of each bag is automatically calculated by the control unit depending on
the Empty Bag Method setting in Custom mode. If Empty Bag Method is set to
“Fixed”, the tare of the Dialysate, PBP, Replacement, Replacement2 bag is set to a
fixed value (default: 230 g). If Variable Empty Bag method is selected, the tare of
the Dialysate, PBP, Replacement, Replacement2 bag is automatically calculated
each time a new bag is loaded.
b. Pressing STOP stops all pumps, clears the alarm, and displays the Stop screen.
The following options are available: resume treatment, change set, end treatment, or
temporarily disconnect patient from set.
c. Too many unsuccessful attempts to clear this alarm could lead to error in patient
fluid balance/fluid removal that could result in patient injury or death. Verify fluid
removal accuracy. In case of discrepancy between the prescribed value and fluid
removed, consult physician and discontinue the treatment if required. CRRT: When
the error in patient fluid balance/fluid removal exceeds the Patient Fluid Loss/Gain
Limit a Caution: Loss Limit Reached alarm or Caution: Gain Limit Reached alarm
will occur requiring therapy to be discontinued or the set to be changed.
TPE: After 10 unsuccessful attempts to clear this alarm in less than 3 hours, a
Caution: Unresolved Flow Problems alarm will occur requiring therapy to be
discontinued or the set to be changed.

Advisory Alarms
Anticoagulation Check Points
Reminder to monitor patient "Citrate-Calcium" anticoagulation

parameters. methods requires additional monitoring of
patient parameters. This advisory occurs
at a specific time interval when citrate is
used.
If "Citrate – Calcium, External Pump"
anticoagulation method is selected, ensure
proper delivery of calcium using an
external syringe / infusion pump.
Note: To change this checkpoint interval,
use SYSTEM TOOLS in Status screen.
Check with your physician for the
occurrence of this advisory.
Battery Exhausted
Observation:
Applicable when machine configuration includes the back-up battery (check with the
local representative for more information).
Appears when the power level of the back-up battery is too low.
Back-up battery is depleted. Press OVERRIDE and continue with setup.

Machine needs to remain on for charging
the battery at least 4 hours.
Note: In case of main power failure
before the battery back-up is fully charged
again, the machine will operate as if
no battery back-up was installed. See
“Power Failure” on page 5:101 for more
information.
Alarm recurs due to old battery or Leave the machine on or operate for more
broken internal wiring. than 24 hours.
If the alarm does not self-clear within 24
hours, call service.

Alarm recurs due to old battery or Check the connection battery wiring.
broken internal wiring. Remedy, if necessary. Check the recharge
capacity of the battery. If malfunction,
replace the battery.
Blood Flow Stopped
Observation:
Machine has been left in the Stop screen for 60 seconds.
Machine left in the Stop screen for Inspect blood flowpath for signs of
more than 60 seconds (all pumps clotting. If clotted, change the set.
stopped). Press CONTINUE to clear alarm and
return to the Stop screen, then choose
CHANGE SET.
If flowpath not clotted, press
CONTINUE to clear alarm and return to
the Stop screen.
Calcium Line Clamped
Calcium line is clamped. Unclamp the calcium infusion line. Press

CONTINUE.
The central venous access on the Unclamp the central venous access on the
patient is clamped. patient.
The central venous access on the Check patient access patency for potential
patient is obstructed by clots or obstructions. Consult a physician for
sticks fast to the intima of the vein. assessment of the central venous catheter.
Incorrect installation of syringe Inspect calcium infusion line, remove any

line. clamps, kinks or other obstructions. Use
the clip above the syringe pump for the
calcium infusion line to avoid kinks. Press
CONTINUE.
Note: In case of recurring alarm, press

CHANGE SYR/LINE softkey to change
both the syringe and the calcium line.

Calcium Syringe Empty
Calcium syringe is empty. Press CHANGE SYR/LINE softkey and

follow the instructions on the screen to
install a full syringe. Then return to alarm
screen and press CONTINUE.
Note: Use only a 50 ml syringe of

the allowed brand when the “Citrate
method is chosen.
Ca Line Not Connected
Calcium line is not connected to Connect a dedicated calcium infusion line

the syringe. to the syringe. Press CONTINUE.
Wrong line connected. Use only a dedicated infusion line for

the calcium infusion when the “Citrate
method is chosen.
The unused syringe line on the Clamp the unused syringe line on the
disposable set is connected to the disposable set and left unused during
calcium syringe. entire treatment when “Citrate – Calcium,
chosen. Press CHANGE SYR/LINE softkey
and follow the instructions on the screen
to connect a dedicated calcium infusion
line to the syringe.
A syringe of the wrong size is Use only a 50 ml syringe of the allowed

installed. brand when the “Citrate – Calcium,
chosen.
Air in syringe. Press CHANGE SYR/LINE. Follow

Missing non-return valve on Press CHANGE SYR/LINE. Follow

calcium infusion line. instructions to install a new calcium
infusion line with a non-return valve and

Cannot Detect Return
Observation:
This alarm occurs when the return pressure operating point is more negative than
+10 mmHg.
Machine is unable to detect return line and catheter disconnections.
Return line or catheter is Make sure return catheter is securely

disconnected. connected to both the return line and the
patient.
To override this alarm, press OVERRIDE.
Catheter size too large or blood If catheter size is too large for the
flow too low. prescribed blood flow rate, consider to
change to a smaller catheter.
If compatible with prescription, press
FLOW SETTINGS and increase the blood
flow rate. When back in the alarm screen,
press OVERRIDE.
Chamber monitor line not securely If the fluid barrier is not damaged, secure
connected to return pressure port. monitor line to the luer lock of the return
pressure port and press OVERRIDE. If the
fluid barrier is damaged, change the set
(press STOP, then CHANGE SET.)
Return pressure sensor failed. Check Return pressure in Diagnose Screen

– Pressure Pod Reposition on page 6:30.
pump.
Check the pressure sensors and pressure
ARPS circuit for leakage in Diagnose
6:30. If leakage is detected, remedy the
pressure sensor, pressure valves, ARPS
pump alt ARPS circuit.
Perform a calibration, see Calibration
6:30.

sensor.
Ca Syringe Almost Empty
Calcium syringe will be empty in To install a full syringe when this advisory
5 minutes. appears, press CHANGE SYR/LINE and
follow instructions on the screen.
Then return to alarm screen and press
CONTINUE.
Ca Syringe Not Loaded
The calcium syringe is not loaded. Press the CHANGE SYR/LINE softkey
to load a calcium syringe. Then press
RETEST to restart Syringe Test. If failure
recurs, end treatment via DISCONNECT.
Call service.
The calcium syringe is not Check the function of the syringe pump
loaded although the “Citrate with in Diagnose Screen – Syringe Pump
integrated calcium” method has on page 6:36. Perform a calibration,
been selected. see Calibration Screen – Syringe Pump
Calibration on page 6:66.
If malfunction, replace the syringe pump.
Check Access
Observation:
When running with an operating point below –10 mmHg, this alarm occurs if access
pressure is 50 mmHg or 70 mmHg (if blood flow>200 ml/min) above or below its
operating point, or if the pressure rises above 0 mmHg.
When running with an operating point in the range between –10 mmHg and +20
mmHg, this alarm occurs if the access pressure is 50 mmHg or 70 mmHg (if blood
flow>200 ml/min) below its operating point, or if the access pressure is 10 mmHg or
more above its operating point.
When running with an operating point above +20 mmHg, this alarm occurs if the
access pressure drops below +10 mmHg.

NOTE: An operating point is the pressure value when the pressure is considered
stable after an event (alarm, change of blood flow, etc).
Possible leakage or disconnection Make sure access line is securely

of access line or catheter. connected to catheter/blood source.
Remedy, press CONTINUEa.
Possible kink or obstruction in Remedy, press CONTINUEa.

access line or catheter.
Patient is coughing or being moved. Press CONTINUEa.
Catheter is clotted or out of Check the position of the catheter in the

position. vein.
Blood flow rate is too high. Decrease blood flow rate, return to alarm
screen and press CONTINUEa.
Blood flowpath is obstructed after Remedy, if possible. Press CONTINUEa.

access pressure pod. If not possible, press STOPb and use
Check Return
Observation:
This alarm occurs if return pressure is 50 mmHg or 70 mmHg (if blood
flow>200ml/min) above its operating point.
NOTE: An operating point is the pressure value when the pressure is considered
stable after an event (alarm, change of blood flow, etc).
Possible kink or obstruction in Remedy, press CONTINUEg.

return line or catheter.
Patient is moving. Press CONTINUEg.
Catheter is clotted or out of position Remedy, press CONTINUEg.

in vein.
Blood flow rate is too high. Decrease blood flow rate, return to alarm
screen and press CONTINUE. This alarm
self-clears once condition no longer exists.

Check Syringe Line
Observation:
Alarm occurs when pressure exerted by syringe pump indicates syringe line may be
clamped. All pumps are stopped while confirmation of clamping is in progress.
This alarm self-clears when condition no longer exists.
Note: If this alarm is not cleared within 8 seconds the Advisory: Syringe Line
Clamped alarm occurs.
Download Interrupted
Observation:
Download of history data to the technical data card has failed.
The technical data card is full. Insert an empty technical data card into
the technical data card holder. Press
DOWNLD DATA to retry downloading the
history data.
There is no technical data card in Insert a new technical data card into
the technical data card holder or the the technical data card holder. Press
technical data card in the holder is DOWNLD DATA to retry downloading the
damaged. history data.
Internal malfunction related to the Press CONTINUE to clear the alarm and
technical data card holder/reader. proceed without downloading history
data. If alarm recurs during subsequent
treatments, call service.
Internal malfunction related to the Check the function of the PCMCIA board
technical data card holder/reader. in Diagnose Screen – Communication on
page 6:45. If malfunction, replace the
board.
Filter is Clotting
Observation:
Increasing TMP and/or Pressure Drop.
Note: TMP value in the MARSFLUX filter is not considered for this alarm during
CRRT MARS therapy.

Inadequate anticoagulation of the Press STOP, change the set or test

The Warning: Filter Clotted alarm occurs
when the blood in the filter is clotted.
Ultrafiltration is too high. Lower TMP by: (a) decreasing the PBP,
replacement and/or patient fluid removal
rates; (b) increasing the blood flow rate.
Press OVERRIDEc; continue to monitor
the set.
Kinked lines in blood flowpath. Remedy and press OVERRIDEc.
If syringe pump is being used for Ensure syringe is properly installed in

anticoagulation, syringe may be syringe pump holder and plunger is
incorrectly installed or syringe moving upward during treatment. If
pump may have failed. plunger is not moving, syringe pump
has failed. If desired, connect syringe
line to a medically acceptable alternate
anticoagulant delivery system. Call
service to repair pump.
Air leak between deaeration If the fluid barrier is not wet with blood,
chamber monitor line and return secure monitor line to the luer lock of the
pressure sensor. return pressure port and press OVERRIDE.
If the fluid barrier is wet with blood, press
STOP and change the set.
Wrong measurement of filter or Press OVERRIDE to reach Status screen.

effluent pressure. Press SYSTEM TOOLS and perform a
self-test.
Filter, effluent or return pressure Press OVERRIDE to reach Status screen.

sensor failed. Press SYSTEM TOOLS and perform a
self-test. If pressure sensor failure is
confirmed, end the treatment and call
service.
Syringe pump may have failed. Check the function of the syringe pump
in Diagnose Screen – Syringe Pump
on page 6:36. Perform a calibration,
see Calibration Screen – Syringe Pump

Filter, Effluent or Return pressure Check the function of the pressure
sensor failed. sensors in Diagnose Screen – Pressure
Pod Reposition on page 6:30. If
pressure deviation in diagnose perform
a calibration, see Calibration Screen –
Pressure Sensors Calibration on page 6:64.
Check the pressure in Diagnose Screen –
sensor.
Fluid Pumps Stopped
Citrate anticoagulation is used and Remedy the cause of interruption.

fluid pumps have stopped for more Additional monitoring of patient’s
than 10 minutes. laboratory chemistry must be performed
Not applicable to “Citrate – on patient: ionized calcium (Ca2+)
Calcium, Prismaflex Syringe
Pump” anticoagulation method.
HP Cartridge is Clotting
Observation:
Increasing Pressure Drop.
Inadequate anticoagulation of the Press STOP, change the set or test patient’s
extra corporeal circuit. clotting parameters and adjust if needed.


Filter or return pressure sensor Clear the alarm to reach Status screen.
failed. Press SYSTEM TOOLS and perform
SELF-TEST. If the pod problem is not
solved, press STOP and end the treatment.
Turn off machine. Call for service.
Or operator's action directs wrong
measurement.
Wrong measurement of Filter End treatment by pressing STOP. Call

pressure. service.
Wrong measurement of Filter Check the function of the pressure sensors

pressure. in Diagnose Screen – Pressure Pod
Service action.
Filter or Return pressure sensor Perform a calibration, see Calibration

failed. Screen – Pressure Sensors Calibration on
6:30.
sensor.
Incomplete Bolus
Observation:
Appears when a bolus is interrupted. The blood pump has been stopped, either by
the operator or another alarm.
An anticoagulation bolus could not Check patient´s anticoagulation status.

be completed. If indicated, administer not delivered
volume.

Main Power Lost
Observation:
Main power is lost and system operates on battery backup.
Power Cord is not connected. Reconnect the power cord.

Press OVERRIDE to continue treatment
until the Warning: Battery Low alarm
occurs.
This alarm self-clears when condition no
longer exists.
MARS Treatment
CRRT MARS treatment ongoing Set the MARS pump to the prescribed
for more than 1 minute. flow rate and press the START softkey on
the MARS monitor. Press CONTINUE on
the Prismaflex screen to return to Status
screen. Make sure that all blue clamps are
open.
Memory Back-Up
Observation:
Applicable when machine configuration does not include the back-up battery (check
with the local representative for more information).
Memory back-up battery is Press OVERRIDEc and continue with

depleted. setup. Machine needs to remain on for
charging the battery at least 4 hours.
Note: In case of main power lost before
the battery is charged again, the machine
will stop. When resuming power, machine
will start up with Query screen.
Select NEW PRIME or CONTINUE and
follow the instructions on the screen.
Alarm recurs due to old battery or Leave the machine on or operate for more
broken internal wiring. than 24 hours.
If the alarm does not self-clear within 24
hours, call service.

Plasmafilter is Clotting
Observation:
Increasing Pressure Drop.
Note: The Warning: Plasmafilter clotted alarm occurs when the blood in the
Plasmafilter is clotted.
Blood flow rate is too high or Decrease blood flow rate or decrease PBP
plasmafiltration rate is too high. and/or replacement flow ratesc.

Filter or return pressure sensor Clear the alarm to reach Status screen.
Wrong measurement of filter or End treatment by pressing STOP. Call

effluent pressure. service.

Wrong measurement of Filter or Check the function of the pressure sensors

Effluent pressure. in Diagnose Screen – Pressure Pod
Service action.
Filter or return pressure sensor Perform a calibration, see Calibration

6:30.
sensor.
Self-Test Overdue
Observation:
Periodic self-test failed completion within the last 150 minutes of treatment.
Test was interrupted by secondary Press OVERRIDE; remedy root cause of

alarms. secondary alarms (e.g. access problems).
Self-test will start automatically.
Test was interrupted by operator Press OVERRIDE; postpone

interventions (including update of operator interventions and return to
prescription settings, and bag or Status screen, if possible. Self-test
syringe changes) will start automatically.
Test was repeatedly overridden by Press OVERRIDE; self-test will start

operator. automatically.
Syringe Almost Empty
Syringe will be empty in 5 min. To install a full syringe when this advisory
appears, press CHANGE SYRINGE and
follow instructions on screen. Then return
to alarm screen and press CONTINUE.

Syringe Empty
Syringe pump is in end-of-travel Press CHANGE SYRINGE, follow

position, indicating that syringe is instructions to install a full syringe, press
empty. CONTINUE.
Note: Install only the allowed syringe
(size/brand specified in Custom mode). If
desired, continue without syringe delivery.
To do this:
Press ANTICOAG SETTINGS, change to
“Continuous, 0 ml/h”; return
to alarm screen.
Push plunger clamp release button to
release syringe pump from end-of-travel
position.
Press CONTINUE and alarm clears.
Syringe Line Clamped
Syringe line on the disposable set Inspect syringe line; remove any clamps;
is clamped, kinked or obstructed in kinks, or other obstructions. Press
another way. CONTINUE.
Incorrect installation of syringe Reinstall syringe line. Press CONTINUE.

line.
Alarm is recurring. Press CHANGE SYRINGE; follow

instruction to change the syringe and
return to alarm screen. Then Press
CONTINUE.
Syringe Not Loaded
The syringe is not loaded after Press CHANGE SYRINGE, follow

Syringe Test has been performed. instructions to load the syringe and return
to alarm screen.
Press RETEST to restart Syringe Test.
If failure recurs, press DISCONNECT, call
service and report failure.

The syringe pump failed. Check the function of the syringe pump
Time to Change Set
Observation:
Hours of use have reached the operator-set “Time to Change Set” limit for this
therapy/set combination.
A “Time to Change Set” advisory Press STOPe and change the set or press
limit has been reached. OVERRIDE and continue to monitor the
setf.
Warning:
The Prismaflex disposable set must be changed after 72 hours of use. Continued use
beyond this limit could result in rupture of the pump segments.
Note: To ensure adequate filter performance, it is recommended that CRRT
disposable sets are changed every 24 hours of use.
During CRRT MARS treatment: Press STOPe and change the disposable
A “Time to Change Set” advisory sets on both the Prismaflex control
limit has been reached. unit and the MARS monitor or press
OVERRIDE and continue to monitor the
setf.
Note: Do not use the X-MARS kit beyond 24 hours. The adsorption columns
(diaMARS IE 250 and diaMARS AC 250) are likely to be saturated after this
operating time.
TMPa Too High
Observation:
Access transmembrane pressure has reached user-set pressure limit.
Note: The Warning: Plasmafilter clotted alarm occurs when the blood in the
Plasmafilter is clotted.

Blood flow rate is too high or Decrease blood flow rate or decrease PBP
plasmafiltration rate is too high. and/or replacement flow ratesc.

Filter or effluent pressure sensor Clear the alarm to reach Status screen.
Or operator's action directs wrong
measurement.
Filter or Effluent sensor failed. Perform a calibration, see Calibration

6:30.
sensor.

TMP Too High
Observation:
Transmembrane pressure has reached user-set pressure limit.
Ultrafiltration rate (UFR) is too Decrease the replacement and/or patient

high for the present blood flow rate. fluid removal flow rates and/or PBP or
(UFR = patient fluid removal rate increase the blood flow rate. Return to
+ replacement solution rate + PBP alarm screen and press OVERRIDEc.
rate)
Inadequate anticoagulation of the Press STOP, change the set or test

Note: The Warning: Filter Clotted alarm
occurs when the blood in the filter is
clotted.

Filter or effluent pod failure. Clear the alarm to reach Status screen.
Press SYSTEM TOOLS and perform
solved, press STOP and change the set.
Filter or effluent pressure sensor Clear the alarm to reach Status screen.
SELF-TEST. If the pressure problem is not
Wrong measurement of filter or End treatment by pressing STOP. Call

effluent pressure. service.

During CRRT MARS treatment: Decrease the replacement and/or patient
MARSFLUX filter and diaFLUX fluid removal and/or PBP rates.
filter transmembrane pressure has
reached user-set pressure limit.
Wrong measurement of Filter or Check the function of the pressure sensors

Effluent pressure. in Diagnose Screen – Pressure Pod
Service action.
Filter or Effluent pressure sensor Perform a calibration, see Calibration

6:30.
sensor.
Footnotes
a. CONTINUE clears the alarm and resets all operating points except for the return
pressure operating point if it is above +10 mmHg.
b. Pressing STOP stops all pumps, clears the alarm, and displays the Stop screen.
The following options are available: resume treatment, change set, end treatment, or
temporarily disconnect patient and recirculate sterile saline though set.
c. Alarm can also be overridden if operator decides action is not necessary at this
time. Alarm self-clears when condition no longer exists.
d. Too many unsuccessful attempts to clear this alarm could lead to error in patient
fluid balance/fluid removal that could result in patient injury or death. If alarm
reoccurs, press HISTORY and verify fluid removal accuracy. In case of discrepancy
between the prescribed value and fluid removed, consult physician and discontinue
the treatment if required.
e. Pressing STOP stops all pumps and displays the Stop screen. The set can be
changed by pressing CHANGE SET on the Stop screen. Alarm clears when set is
unloaded.
f. Alarm can also be overridden if operator decides action is not necessary at this
time. Alarm clears when set is unloaded.
g. CONTINUE clears the alarm and resets all operating points.

Malfunction Alarms
Air Detector
Air bubble detector failed self-tests. Press RETEST. If alarm does not clear,
end treatment via DISCONNECT or
manuallya. Call service. Do not use device
until serviced.
Return line not installed or Install return line in air bubble detector.
improperly installed in air bubble When ready, press CONTINUE.
detector.
Air bubble detector failed self-tests. Check the functions of the air bubble
detector in Diagnose Screen – Air Detector
on page 6:34. Perform a calibration, see
Calibration Screen – Air Detector on page
6:85 If malfunction, replace the Air bubble
detector.
Auto Blood Return
Blood return volume incongruence. End treatment via DISCONNECT. If alarm

recurs, call service.
Blood Leak Detector
Observation:
Effluent line not properly installed in blood leak detector. Blood leak detector failed
self-tests.
Effluent line is not installed, is Press line into detector from bottom
improperly installed, or is removed up; route through tubing guides. Press
from detector. RETEST.

Room or sun light. Protect BLD from light source.

RETEST.
Warning:
has started.
Blood leak detector failed. If alarm does not clear, change set via
CHANGE SET or end treatment via
DISCONNECTa. Call service.
detector.
Blood Pump
Observation:
Rate of Blood pump is incorrect.
Momentary problem with pump Press CONTINUE.

roller or pump segment in raceway.
Impeding object, clamped line If alarm recurs, end treatment:

or kinked line in pump raceway; Press CONTINUE. When
thumb screw in center of rotor has Status screen appears, immediately
loosened. press STOP.
On Stop screen, choose
END TREATMENT and follow the
instructions to disconnect patient and
unload set.
Call service to remedy/clear alarmb.

Pump failed. Call for service.
Thumb screw in center of rotor has Check the screw, remedy if needed.
loosened.
Pump failed. Check the function of the Blood pump in

Diagnose Screen – Pumps Diagnose on
page 6:26.
If malfunction, replace the Blood pump.
Cannot Save Custom Data
Error in saving newly customized Press EXIT CUSTOM. If desired, return to

values. Custom mode, and try again to customize.
If alarm recurs, call serviceb.
Note: Patient treatments can be conducted before problem is remedied. The last
saved Custom mode values will be used for these treatments.
Error in saving newly customized Check the Compact Flash Card. If

values. malfunction, replace it.
Ca Syringe Not Loaded
Observation:
The calcium syringe is not loaded. Press the CHANGE SYR/LINE to load a
calcium syringe. Then press RETEST to
restart the Syringe Test. If failure recurs,
end treatment via DISCONNECT. Call
service.

Checksum Interrupted
Power loss occurred while internal End treatment via DISCONNECT or

“checksum” information update manuallya, then start a new treatment.
was in progress. Some settings
might have been lost. Data block in
question is identified on the alarm
screen.
Clamp Stuck Closed
External force on return line clamp. Check return line clamp. Press RETEST.
Return line clamp failed. If alarm does not clear, change set via
CHANGE SET or end treatment via
DISCONNECTa. Call service.
Return line clamp failed. Check the function of the return line clamp
in Diagnose Screen – Clamp and Pinch
Valves on page 6:41.
If malfunction, replace the Return line
clamp.

Communication Error
Observation:
Error Code: 2 to 7
Due to:
Code=2 No communication with the protective task
Code=3 Communication link error on the protective slave
Code=4 Communication link error on the control system
Code=5 Missing status command from protective slave
Code=6 Missing alarm command from protective slave
Code=7 The protective task isn’t able to send message to the slave
See “Due to” message on alarm Turn machine off, remove return line from
screen. return line clamp, and return blood (when
applicable).
Note: Treatment can not resume using the
loaded set once blood has been returned.
Restart machine. Once Query screen
appears, make choice and carefully follow
instructions.
If alarm recurs, end treatment manually
(see above). Call service and report failure
code before using machine again.
Code=2 No communication with The codes can appear by themselves or in

the protective task combination.
Code=3 Communication link error Use the software CD. If there has been an
on the protective slave error in the actual software download or if
Code=4 Communication link error there is an issue on the I2C bus, this can
on the control system be shown.
Code=5 Missing status command Connect a key board and insert the
from protective slave Software CD. Go into the BIOS Menu and
Code=6 Missing alarm command verify that the Boot sequence is set to CD
from protective slave ROM, C, A. Exit the BIOS menu. Follow
Code=7 The protective task isn’t the instruction given on the screen.
able to send message to the slave Make sure all components are correctly
connected. Make sure all boards have
voltage.
If malfunction, replace the component.

Custom Data
Not able to access Custom mode Discontinue use. If applicable, use

values for selected therapy/set. DISCONNECT to unload/remove set.
Turn machine off and call service to
remedy and clear the alarm.b
Dialysate Pump
Observation:
Rate of dialysate (green) pump is incorrect.


unload set.
Clamped line. Check for clamped line. Press CONTINUE
Thumb screw in center of rotor has Check the screw. Remedy if needed.
loosened.
Pump failed. Check the function of the Dialysate pump

page 6:26.
If malfunction, replace the Dialysate
pump.

Dialysate Scale Sensor
Observation:
The bar tray of the dialysate scale Place the scale in open position and then
has not been pulled out and then in closed position. Press RETEST. If this
pushed into the control unit to does not clear the alarm, end treatment via
attach the dialysate bag. DISCONNECT. Call service.
The scale position sensor failed. End treatment via DISCONNECT. Call
service.
Scale sensor failure. Check the function of the scale sensor

page 6:28.
The scale position sensor failed. See above action.
Effluent Pump
Observation:
Rate of effluent (yellow) pump is incorrect.


unload set.

loosened.
Pump failed. Check the function of the Effluent pump

page 6:26.
If malfunction, replace the Effluent pump.
Effluent Scale Sensor
Observation:
The bar tray of the effluent scale Place the scale in open position and then
has not been pulled out and then in closed position. Press RETEST. If this
pushed into the control unit to does not clear the alarm, End treatment via
attach the effluent bag. DISCONNECT. Call service.
service.

page 6:28.

General System Failure
Observation:
Error Code: 1 to 6
Turning Fluid pumps or Blood Turn machine off, remove return line from
pump when machine in Safe state; return line clamp, and return blood (when
Clamp forced to wrong position applicable).
when machine in Safe state; No Note: Treatment can not resume using the
communication. loaded set once blood has been returned.
instructions.
Code 1 Blood pump movement. Code 1

Code 2 Fluid pump(s) movement. Check the function of the Blood pump
Code 3 Return clamp not closed. in Diagnose Screen – Pumps Diagnose
Code 4 Criteria_Counter vs on page 6:26. If malfunction, replace the
Criteria_Exhausted mismatch in Blood pump.
Protective Slave. Code 2
Code 5 I2C error during start-up. Check the function of the pump(s) in
Code 6 Syringe Pump movement. Diagnose Screen – Pumps Diagnose on
page 6:26. If malfunction, replace the
pump(s).
Code 3
Check the function of the Return clamp
If malfunction, replace the Return clamp.
Code 4
Check the function of the Hall sensor in
page 6:26. If malfunction, replace the Hall
sensor.
Code 5
Use the software CD. If there has been an
error in the actual software download or if
there is an issue on the I2C bus, this can
be shown.
Connect a key board and insert the
Software CD. Go into the BIOS Menu and
verify that the Boot sequence is set to CD
ROM, C, A. Exit the BIOS menu. Follow
the instruction given on the screen.

Code 6
Check the function of the syringe pump
Calibration on page 6:51. If malfunction,
replace the syringe pump.
Library Data
Cannot access manufacturer-set Discontinue use. If applicable, use

default values. DISCONNECT to unload/remove set.
Turn machine off and call service to
remedy and clear the alarm.b
Cannot access manufacturer-set Check the Compact Flash Card. If

default values. malfunction, replace it.
Line in Air Detector
Return line installed in air bubble Remove line from air bubble detector,
detector before loading a set. then close door of air bubble detector.
Press RETEST. If alarm doesn’t clear, turn
machine off. Call service.
Tubing detection switch failed. Turn machine off. Call service.
Tubing detection switch failed. Check the function of the Tubing detection
switch, see Diagnose Screen – Air
Detector on page 6:34.
If malfunction, replace the Air detector.

Line in Clamp
Return line installed in Return Line Remove line from Return Line Clamp.
Clamp before loading a set. Press RETEST. If alarm doesn’t clear, turn
machine off. Call service.
Tubing detection switch failed. Turn machine off. Call service
switch in Diagnose Screen – Clamp and
Pinch Valves on page 6:41.
Lower Pinch Valve
The lower pinch valve is in the Remove any obstructions and press
wrong position for the therapy RETEST. If this does not clear the alarm,
selected and the current infusion end treatment via DISCONNECT. Call
method selected (Pre/Post) due to service.
obstructions.
The lower pinch valve failed. End treatment via DISCONNECT. Call
service.
The lower pinch valve failed. Check the function of the lower pinch
valve in Diagnose Screen – Clamp and
If malfunction, change the lower pinch
valve.
Memory Error
Observation:
Error Code: number 1, 3 – 7
Due to:
Code=1 Memory error on Protective task.

Code=3 Wrong CRC of a set value.
Code=4 Set value incongruence between Protective slave and task.
Code=5 Incongruence on the alarm structure of the control system.
Code=6 Set value incongruence between protective and control.c
Code=7 Backup memory
See “Due to” message on alarm Turn machine off, remove return line from
screen. return line clamp, and return blood (when
applicable).
Note: Treatment can not resume using the
loaded set once blood has been returned.
instructions.
Code=1 Memory error on Code 1, 3 – 5, 7

Protective task. Use the Software CD to verify the correct
Code=3 Wrong CRC of a set value. Software CRC on the Protective.
Code=4 Set value incongruence Connect a key board and insert the
between Protective slave and task. Software CD. Go into the BIOS Menu and
Code=5 Incongruence on the alarm verify that the Boot sequence is set to CD
structure of the control system. ROM, C, A. Exit the BIOS menu. Follow
Code=6 Set value incongruence the instruction given on the screen.
between protective and control Code 6
system. Restart the Prismaflex control unit with
Code=7 Backup memory the main switch. Reinstall the syringe if
needed. Re-enter the fluid flows.
No Line in Air Detector
Return line not installed or not Open door of air bubble detector and insert
properly installed in air bubble line into air bubble detector. If return
detector. line is installed in the air bubble detector,
press line into detector from bottom up
and route securely through tubing guides.
Press RETEST. If alarm doesn’t clear, end
treatment via DISCONNECT. Call service.
Tubing detection switch failed. End treatment via DISCONNECT. Call

service.

switch, see Diagnose Screen – Air
Detector on page 6:34.
If malfunction, replace the Air detector.
No Line in Clamp
Return line not installed or not Insert line into the clamp. Press RETEST.
properly installed in Return Line If alarm doesn’t clear, end treatment via
Clamp. DISCONNECT. Call service.
Tubing detection switch failed. End treatment via DISCONNECT. Call

service.
switch in Diagnose Screen – Clamp and
Normalization Failed
Observation:
Attempt to normalize blood leak detector has failed.
Filter blood leak; defective effluent Press CHANGE SET and follow the
line; air bubble in effluent line instructions to load a new set. If alarm
at level of BLD; effluent line not recurs with new set, detector has failed.
correctly installed; blood leak Press DISCONNECT to end treatment.
detector failed. Call service.
Note: The Malfunction:
Normalization failed alarm is
displayed when the blood leak
detector normalization has failed 3
times in a row.

detector.
PBP Pump
Observation:
Rate of pre-blood (white) pump is incorrect.


unload set.
loosened.
Pump failed. Check the function of the PBP pump in

page 6:26.
If malfunction, replace the PBP pump.

PBP Scale Sensor
Observation:
The bar tray of the PBP scale has Place the scale in open position and then
not been pulled out and then pushed in closed position. Press RETEST. If this
in the control unit to attach the PBP does not clear the alarm, end treatment via
bag. DISCONNECT. Call service.
service.
Scale sensor failure Check the function of the scale sensor

page 6:28.
Pressures Circuit Board
Hardware failure on pressures Turn machine off, remove return line from
circuit board. return line clamp, and return blood (when
applicable). Call service.
Hardware failure on pressures Check the function of the pressure sensors

circuit board. in Diagnose Screen – Pressure Pod
If malfunction, replace the pressures
circuit board.

Pressure Zero Test
Observation:
Zero test of one or more pressure sensors failed.
One or more pressure pods If pressure pods are installed in housings,

are installed in pressure sensor remove them. Press RETEST.
housings, but should not be
installed yet.
One or more pressure sensors failed If alarm does not clear, turn off machine.
or are incorrectly calibrated. Call service.
One or more pressure sensors failed Check the function of the pressure
or are incorrectly calibrated. sensors in Diagnose Screen – Pressure
Pod Reposition on page 6:30. Perform
a calibration, see Calibration Screen –
Pressure Sensors Calibration on page 6:64.
If malfunction, change the pressure
sensors.
Prime Self-Test
Observation:
Code: 1 to 28.
Detailed information on different alarm codes follows below.
One or more of the tests conducted Softkeys on alarm screen vary, depending
during prime self-test failed. upon failure reason. All softkeys clear the
alarm.
DISCONNECT provides instructions to
unload/remove set.
NEW SET gives instructions to unload set,
load a new set, and start a new priming
cycle.
REPRIME provides instructions to reprime
the set.
RETEST restarts the prime test.

Prime Self-Test
Observation:
Code: 1–7.
Due to: Pressure pod/sensor. All affected pods are reported.
Code=1 Access
Code=2 Filter
Code=3 Access and Filter
Code=4 Effluent (CRRT, TPE)
Code=5 Access and Effluent (CRRT, TPE)
Code=6 Filter and Effluent (CRRT, TPE)
Code=7 Access, Effluent and Filter (CRRT, TPE)
Pressure pod(s) not installed; debris Install/check that all reported pressure
in sensor housing(s); leaking pod. pod(s) on the alarm screen are installed
correctly. Press RETEST.
Clamped lines in set. Unclamp any clamped lines. Press

RETEST.
Pressure sensor(s) failed. Unload set via DISCONNECT. Call

service and report failure code.
Pressure sensor(s) failed Check the function of the ARPS according

to point 10, 11 in Diagnose Screen –
Check the function of the pressure sensors
Reposition on page 6:30. If deviation,
perform a calibration, see Calibration
page 6:64.
If malfunction, replace the ARPS and/or
pressure sensors.

Prime Self-Test
Observation:
Code=16
Due to: Return pressure sensor.
Clamped lines in set. Unclamp any clamped lines. Press

RETEST.
Chamber monitor line not securely Verify the fluid barrier is not wet/
connected to return pressure port. damaged. If not wet/damaged, secure
monitor line to the luer lock of the return
pressure port and press REPRIME to prime
the same set again. If the fluid barrier is
wet/damaged, press DISCONNECT and
use CHANGE SET to load/prime a new set.
Pressure sensor(s) failed. If failure occurs again with a new set,

unload set via DISCONNECT. Call service
and report failure code.
Air in set and bad priming quality. Press REPRIME to prime the set again.
Pressure sensor(s) failed. Check the function of the ARPS and

Return pressure sensors in Diagnose
6:30. If deviation, perform a calibration,
see Calibration Screen – Pressure Sensors
Return pressure sensors.

Prime Self-Test
Observation:
Code=17 and 18
Due to: Blood leak detector normalization timeout or Blood leak detector threshold
error.
Effluent line not correctly installed Reinstall effluent line (from bottom
in blood leak detector. up); route through tubing guides. Press
RETEST.
Air bubble in effluent line at level Dislodge bubble by removing line from
of blood leak detector. detector / tapping on tube. Press RETEST.
Set not fully primed. Check for clamped lines and for
connections; remedy. Press REPRIME and
follow instructions. If failure recurs after
the above Operator Responses, retry with
a new set (Press NEW SET and follow
instructions.)
Blood leak detector failed. If failure occurs with the new set, unload
set via DISCONNECT. Call service and
report failure code.

OVERRIDEa.
detector.

Prime Self-Test
Observation:
Code=19
Due to: Air/pumps security test.
Internal malfunction. Press RETEST. If failure recurs, unload

Presence of air at ABD level. Disconnect monitor line and refill the
chamber.
Internal malfunction Check the function of the Air bubble

detector in Diagnose Screen – Air Detector
on page 6:34. If deviation, perform a
calibration. If malfunction, replace the Air
bubble detector. Check the function of
the pump(s) in Diagnose Screen – Pumps
If deviation, replace the pump(s).
Prime Self-Test
Observation:
Code=20
Due to: Pump occlusivity test.
Return line not properly installed Press REPRIME. Install return line in the
in return line clamp; obstruction in released return line clamp and prime the
return line clamp. same set again.
If failure occurs again, press
DISCONNECT and use CHANGE SET to
load/prime a new set.
Deaeration chamber monitor line Verify the fluid barrier is not damaged and
not connected to return pressure tighten fluid barrier connection to chamber
port; errors occurred during monitor line. If not damaged, secure
priming cycle. monitor line to the luer lock of the return
pressure port and press REPRIME to prime
again the same set. If the fluid barrier is

damaged, press DISCONNECT and use
Pump segments improperly loaded; Check for leakages and tighten

obstructions in pump raceways; connections. If failure recurs for three
external leakage in set. times, retry with a new set (Press
NEW SET and follow instructions.)
Pump(s) failed. If failure occurs with a new set, unload

Pump(s) failed, return pressure Check the function of the Return, Effluent
sensor failure or leak in pressure and Filter pressure sensors in Diagnose
ARPS circuit. Screen – Pressure Pod Reposition on
page 6:30. Check the pressure sensors
and pressure ARPS circuit for leakage. If
leakage is detected, remedy the pressure
pod sealing cones, the pressure sensor,
circuit.
Perform a “Verification of slave pump
rotor” test, see point 5 in Component
Replacement on page 6:17.
Check the function of the Blood pump
in Diagnose Screen – Pumps Diagnose
on page 6:26. If malfunction, replace the
Blood pump.
Check the function of the Return line
clamp in Diagnose Screen – Clamp and
If malfunction, replace.
Prime Self-Test
Observation:
Code=21 – 23
Due to: Pinch valve(s).
Pinch valve(s) segment(s) not Press RETEST. If failure recurs, retry with
properly positioned in pinch a new set (Press NEW SET and follow
valve(s). instructions.)

Pinch valve(s) failed. If failure occurs with a new set, unload
Pinch valve failed. Check the function of the pinch valves

If malfunction, replace the pinch valves.
Prime Self-Test
Observation:
Code=24
Due to: 24 volt / 12 volt.
24 volt / 12 volt test failed. Press RETEST. If failure recurs, unload

24 volt / 12 volt test failed. Check that the ARPS circuit are connected
to each of the pressure sensor valve. Check
the function of the ARPS in according to
point 10, 11 in Diagnose Screen – Pressure
Pod Reposition on page 6:30.
If malfunction, replace ARPS pressure
sensor alt ARPS pump.
Prime Self-Test
Observation:
Code=25
Due to: Return clamp sensor.
Obstruction in return line clamp. Press and hold return clamp button. With
the other hand, remove obstruction. Press
RETEST.

Return clamp sensor failed. If alarm failure recurs, unload set via
DISCONNECT. Call service and report
failure code.
Return clamp sensor failed. Check the function of the Return line
sensor in Diagnose Screen – Clamp and
If malfunction, replace the Return clamp
sensor.
Prime Self-Test
Observation:
Code=26
Due to: 24 volt Return clamp sensor.
24 volt and return clamp sensor Press RETEST. If failure recurs, unload
tests failed. set via DISCONNECT. Call service and
24 volt and return clamp sensor Check that the ARPS circuit are connected
tests failed. to each of the pressure sensor valve. Check
the function of the ARPS in according
to point 10, 11 in Diagnose Screen –
If malfunction, replace ARPS pressure
sensor alt ARPS pump. Check the function
of the Return line sensor in Diagnose
Screen – Clamp and Pinch Valves on page
6:41.
If malfunction, replace the Return clamp
sensor.

Prime Self-Test
Observation:
Code=27
Due to: TMPa.
Return line not in clamp. Ensure chamber monitor line is securely

connected to luer lock of the return
pressure port. Press RETEST.
Filter or effluent pressure pod not Install/check that all reported pressure
installed; debris in filter and/or pod(s) on the alarm screen are installed
effluent sensor housings. correctly. Press RETEST.
Set not fully primed. Press REPRIME, follow instructions. If

failure recurs, retry with new set. (Press
NEW SET and follow instructions.)
Filter, effluent, or return pressure If alarm occurs with a new set, press
sensor failed; ARPS failed. unload set via DISCONNECT. Call service
and report failure code.
Filter, effluent, or return pressure Check the function of the ARPS according
sensor failed; ARPS failed. to point 10, 11 in Diagnose Screen –
Check the function of the pressure sensors
If deviation, perform a calibration, see
pressure sensors.

Prime Self-Test
Observation:
Code=28
Due to: Syringe Pump HW.
Internal malfunction: syringe test Press RETEST to restart Syringe Test. .

not completed within 600 s. If failure recurs, press DISCONNECT, call
service and report failure code number.
Replacement Pump
Observation:
Rate of replacement (purple) pump is incorrect.


unload set.
loosened.
Pump failed. Check the function of the Replacement

pump in Diagnose Screen – Pumps
Diagnose on page 6:26. If malfunction,
replace the Replacement pump.

Replacement Pump 2
Observation:
Rate of replacement 2 (green) pump is incorrect.


unload set.
loosened.
Pump failed. Check the function of the Replacement

2 pump in Diagnose Screen – Pumps
If malfunction, replace the Replacement 2
pump.

Replacement Scale Sensor
Observation:
The bar tray of the replacement Place the scale in open position and then
scale has not been pulled out and in closed position. Press RETEST. If this
then pushed into the control unit to does not clear the alarm, end treatment via
attach the replacement bag. DISCONNECT. Call service.
service.

page 6:28. If scale sensor test fails, replace
the scale.
Scales
Observation:
Scale in question is specified on the alarm screen.
Specified scale is out of calibration. Press RETEST. If alarm does not clear,
end treatment via DISCONNECTd. Turn
machine off, remove return line from
return line clamp, and return blood (when
Specified scale is out of calibration. Calibrate the scale, see Calibration Screen
– Scales Calibration on page 6:61. Verify
the function of the scale in Diagnose
Screen – Scale Diagnose on page 6:28.
If deviation, replace the scale.

Scales Circuit Board
Hardware failure on scales circuit End treatment via DISCONNECT. Call

board. service.
Hardware failure on scales circuit Check the function of the scale in Diagnose
board. Screen – Scale Diagnose on page 6:28.
If malfunction, replace the scale.
Scale Zero Test
Observation:
Zero test of one or more scales failed.
Unexpected presence of bag. Remove bag from scale. Close scale and
press RETEST.
Carrying bar missing from one or Place carrying bar back on scale. Close
more scales. scale and press RETEST.
Foreign objects are touching scales Make sure nothing is touching scales and
or hanging from scale carrying no foreign objects are on scale carrying
bars. bars. Press RETEST.
One or more scales failed. If alarm does not clear, turn off machine.
Call service.
One or more scales failed. Check the function of the scales in

Diagnose Screen – Scale Diagnose on
page 6:28. If needed, calibrate the scales,
see Calibration Screen – Scales Calibration
on page 6:61. Run the Prismaflex control
unit again, perform a new Prime.
If the alarm recurs, replace the scale(s).

Self-Test Failure
Observation:
For Possible cause(s) and Operators action(s),
see correspondent code for Prime Self-Test Alarm.
Code=1–7, Pressure pod/sensor
Code=16, Return pressure sensor
Code=18, Blood leak detector threshold error
Code=24, 24 volt / 12 volt
Code=25, Return clamp sensor
Code=26, 24 volt Return clamp sensor
WARNING
The blood leak detector must be re-normalized if the effluent line
is removed and then reinserted into the blood leak detector after
treatment (Run mode) has started.
WARNING
Syringe Not Loaded
The syringe is not loaded after - Press CHANGE SYRINGE, follow

Syringe Test has been performed. instructions to load the syringe and
return to alarm screen.
- Press RETEST to restart Syringe Test.
- If failure recurs, press DISCONNECT,

call service and report failure.

Syringe Pump
Observation:
Code: 1–9.
Code = 1 Working mode incongruence between Syringe pump and set mode.
Code = 2 Rate is incorrect.
Code = 3 Syringe pump is moving in the wrong direction.
Code = 4 Configuration incongruence between Syringe pump and the system / wrong
version of firmware.
Code = 5 Lower sensor out of order.
Code = 6 Maximum of load sensor / unable to read force (short circuit).
Code = 7 Minimum of load sensor / unable to read force (grounded).
Code = 8 Working mode incongruence between Syringe pump and Control unit.
Code = 9 Encoder signal error / engine mechanically blocked.
Syringe pump failed. Press OVERRIDEe. The syringe pump test

will restart after 60 seconds.
For “Systemic, Prismaflex syringe pump”
method: if alarm recurs, it is possible
to continue without using the syringe
pump, if desired. To do this, press
ANTICOAG SETTINGS and set the
syringe pump delivery to “Continuous, 0
ml/h.” Return to alarm screen and press
OVERRIDEe or turn machine off, remove
return line from return line clamp, and
return blood (when applicable). Call
service.
For “Citrate – Calcium, Prismaflex syringe pump” method: if alarm recurs, it is
not possible to proceed. Press END TREATMENT and follow the instructions on
the screen.
Note: Always call service to repair the syringe pump and clear the alarm.
Syringe pump failed. Check the function of the syringe pump


Upper Pinch Valve
The upper pinch valve is in the Remove any obstructions and press
wrong position for the therapy RETEST. If this does not clear the alarm,
selected due to obstructions. end treatment via DISCONNECT. Call
service.
Pinch valve(s) failed. End treatment via DISCONNECT. Call

service.
Upper pinch valve failed. Check the function of the lower pinch
valve in Diagnose Screen – Clamp and
If malfunction, change the lower pinch
valve.
Voltage Out of Range
Internal malfunction related to Turn machine off, remove return line from
the machine Power Supply or the return line clamp, and return blood (when
Power supply cabling. applicable). Call service.
Internal malfunction related to Perform power supply check, see Power

the Prismaflex control unit Power Supply Check on page 6:20. If deviation,
Supply or the Power supply cabling. replace the power supply. Check the
function of the Blood pump in Diagnose
If malfunction, replace the Blood pump.
Footnotes
a. Manual termination instructions are provided at the end of the Troubleshooting
chapter in the Operator’s manual for Prismaflex.
b. This alarm must be cleared in Service mode by an authorized service technician.
c. Memory Error code 6 is triggered when Flow Rate Discrepancy occurs. A Flow
Rate Discrepancy is when any flow rate displayed on the Status screen differs from
that displayed on the Enter Flow Settings Screen.
d. DISCONNECT key is available only if set is loaded onto control unit.
e. OVERRIDE briefly overrides the alarm. Monitor closely.

Miscellaneous
Display Error
Observation:
Display goes blank, status lights go off, non-mutable buzzer sounds.
Power loss, internal power supply Turn off machine to stop buzzer, end
failure. treatment manually, if desireda.
Display Error
Observation:
Display goes blank momentarily, then screen reappears.
Power was lost and restored within None required.

15 seconds.
Display Error
Observation:
Display goes blank or logo screen fails to leave display, status lights may still be
on, no buzzer.
Internal power supply failure; Turn machine off, remove return line from
internal malfunction. return line clamp, and return blood (when
Internal power supply failure; Check the voltage on the boards. Check
internal malfunction. function of the PC 104 board. Check the
connections between the PC 104 board
and the display.

Display Error
Observation:
Display “floats around”
Display failure. Turn machine off, remove return line from

Display failure. Calibrate the display. See section

“Calibrate the display” on page 2:12.
Loader
Observation:
Loader is already in loaded position, so that a set cannot be loaded.
Last set was manually Begin normal Setup procedure.

disconnected. When Load Set screen ap-
pears, press LOAD. Press STOP in
Loading pumps, please
wait screen, then press UNLOAD.
When Load set screen reappears
after Unloading pumps,
please wait screen, follow online
instructions to load the set.

Mis-colored Effluent bag
Observation:
Effluent bag is tinged pink or red.
Patient’s disease state. Discoloration may indicate removed free

hemoglobin, rather than a blood leak in the
filter membrane. Press OVERRIDE and
send effluent sample to blood lab for a cell
count. If the result confirms blood cell
presence, change the set via STOPb.
Effluent contains red blood cells, Send effluent sample to laboratory for
but level is below blood leak analysis. If red blood cells are present,
detection limit. change the set via STOPb.
Hemolysis is occurring due to Verify that the correct clamps are open for
occlusion. the therapy in use, especially for the access
line (red) and return line (blue). Verify
there are no kinks in the access and return
lines. If hemolysis continues, change the
set via the STOP keyb.
Hemolysis is occurring during TPE Press STOP and change set.

therapy.
Set Connections
Observation:
Leakage from set connections.
Connections are loose. Tighten the connections. If leakage

continues, change the set via STOP keyb.

Softkeys
Observation:
Softkeys won’t work.
Touchscreen failed. Turn machine off, remove return line from

Touch screen failed. See actions in Display error-Calibrate the

display.
Footnotes
a. Manual termination instructions are provided in the operator’s manual.
b. See “Change Set and End Treatment Procedures” in “End Mode” in the operator’s
manual.

Power Failure
The Prismaflex control unit is designed to support the operator during
loss of line power or in case the power cord needs to be temporarily
unplugged during operation. The way the control unit handles such
situations depends on the availability of an additional back-up battery
in the control unit, which is available as an accessory.
Note: Line power is required to start the Prismaflex control unit, even
if equipped with a back-up battery.
• If a back-up battery is installed, the treatment will proceed during a

power failure. The Advisory: Main Power Lost alarm will appear
and a battery icon will be visible at the top of the Status screen.
Once the battery is nearly depleted, the Warning: Battery Low
alarm indicates that the treatment must be ended. Instructions how
to do so are provided on the alarm screen.
• If a back-up battery is not installed, the treatment will be suspended

once line power is lost. Should power be restored within 15
seconds, the treatment will resume. Otherwise, the Warning:
Power Failure alarm will appear on the screen and provide recovery
instructions.
See also Advisory: Battery Exhausted and Advisory: Memory Back-up

for more information.


Chapter 6
Maintenance
Contents

Electrical Safety Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
PET - Protective Earth Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Note: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Check of Conductivity Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
ELT / PLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
General conditions for ELT / PLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
ELT - Earth Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
PLT - Patient Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8
Record of Electrical Safety Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
Remarks: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
Conductivity Clip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
PET - Protective Earth Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
ELT - Earth Lekage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
PLT-Patient Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Component replacement with needed ESI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:12
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Tools Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Working Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Prismaflex® PM Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Visual Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Component Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Power Supply Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Exchange of Lead Batteries for Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Service Mode - Checkout using Service Diagnose Mode . . . . . . . . 6:21
Service Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:22
Service - Diagnose Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:24
Diagnose Screen – Pumps Diagnose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:26
Diagnose Screen – Scale Diagnose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:28
Diagnose Screen – Pressure Pod Reposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:30
Diagnose Screen – Alarms Tone and Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:32
Diagnose Screen – Air Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:34
Diagnose Screen – Syringe Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:36
Diagnose Screen – Clamp and Pinch Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:41
Diagnose Screen – BLD (Blood Leak Detector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:43
Diagnose Screen – Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:44
Diagnose Screen – Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:45
Diagnose Screen – PM timer and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:53
Diagnose Screen – Clean Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:55
G5005209 Maintenance 6:1

Diagnose Screen – SW Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:56
Diagnose Screen – 2D Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:57
Service Calibration Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:58
Calibration Screen – Language Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:60
Calibration Screen – Scales Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:61
Calibration Screen – Pressure Sensors Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:64
Calibration Screen – Syringe Pump Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:66
Calibration Screen – Filter Clotting Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:68
Calibration Screen – Set Clock and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:69
Calibration Screen – Screen Brightness Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:70
Calibration Screen – Pitch and Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:71
Calibration Screen – External Communication Interface . . . . . . . . 6:72
Calibration Screen – Therapy/Sets Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:73
Calibration Screen – Anticoagulation Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 6:76
Calibration Screen – Anticoagulation Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:78
Calibration Screen – Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:84
Calibration Screen – Air Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:85
Calibration Screen – IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:86
Calibration Screen – Syringe Holder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:87
Calibration Screen – Supplementary Syringe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:88
Calibration Screen – Settings Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:90
Calibration Screen – Blood Warmer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:92
Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:94
Final Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:97
6:2 Maintenance G5005209

About this Chapter
This chapter provides information regarding maintenance of the
Prismaflex control unit. Chapter is divided in the Preventive
maintenance, Electrical safety inspection, Diagnose and Calibration of

Electrical Safety Inspection
General
To ensure proper operation, a qualified service technician shall perform
an Electrical Safety Inspection (ESI) of the Prismaflex control unit
at regular intervals. ESI should be performed at every maintenance
service (Base-service), but also after replacement of some components
in the Prismaflex control unit according to section “Component
replacement with needed ESI” on page 6:12. Additionally if the
equipment has been exposed to unexpected electrical events on the
main supply or unintentional ingress of fluid has occurred, a full
Electrical Safety Inspection shall be performed. The information
needed to perform ESI is provided in this instruction.
Included in the ESI procedures are checks to verify normal machine

operation. Should the Prismaflex control unit fail to pass any of these
sub-tests, repair or calibration might be needed, then repeat the tests
until the specifications are met.
Following sub-tests are included in the ESI of the Prismaflex control

unit:
• Visual inspection
• PET - Protective earth test
• Check of Conductivity Clip
• ELT - Earth leakage current test
• PLT - Patient leakage current test
To avoid premature aging of isolation material no insulation test shall

be performed during ESI. Spare parts dependent on insulation are
tested at manufacturing and therefore no further test shall be performed
with high voltage.
During the visual inspection of the equipment, the service engineer

shall look for potential faults related to the electrical safety of the
The purpose of the PET test is to verify that the protective earthed parts
of the control unit are properly connected to protective earth, providing
a safe low electrical potential on these in case of insulation failure.
The purposes of the ELT/PLT tests are to verify that non-functional

leakage currents to operator and patient are within safe limits.
When performing the ESI, which requires access to the interior of the
control unit, you must have proper electrostatic safety devices (i.e.
wrist grounding straps or grounding mats) in place to prevent damage
to electrostatic sensitive components within the control unit.

Record sheet for each sub-test are included in the end of this
instruction. The purpose of these records is to document the work done
and to trend the readings from the tests.
Note:
• If the Prismaflex control unit is tested according to IEC 60601-1
(IEC 60601-1: Medical electrical equipment – Part 1: General
requirements for basic safety and essential performance), this
complies with requirements in IEC 62353 (IEC 62353: Medical
electrical equipment – Recurrent test and test after repair of
medical electrical equipment).
Visual inspection
The visual inspection is an important part of the elctrical safety
inspections of the Prismaflex control unit.
The visual inspection is a procedure to make sure that the medical

equipment in use still confirms the specifications and has not suffered
from any external damage and/or contamination.
The visual inspection includes following steps:
1. Exterior parts including covers: look for major damage, cracks etc.
2. Cabling: look for cuts, wrong connections etc.
3. Markings and labelling: check the integrity.
4. Integrity of mechanical parts: check for any visual obstructions.
5. Determine classification of the Prismaflex control unit (BF or CF).

Can be found on the type plate on rear panel.
PET - Protective Earth Test

Note:
• The Prismaflex control unit shall not be connected to mains power
during this test.
• Limit values for PET-test according to IEC 62353.
Test equipment
Safety tester according to IEC 62353.
Test
1. Check that the resistance between the protective earth connection
of the mains plug and the earth connector at the bottom plate where
the scales are attached is ≤ 300 mΩ.

of the mains plug and the earth connector at the PCB holder at the
door is ≤ 300 mΩ.

of the mains plug and the earth connector at the ARPS pump is
≤ 300 mΩ.

of the mains plug and the earth connector for potential equalization
is ≤ 300 mΩ.
Check of Conductivity Clip

Test equipment
Multimeter capable of measuring resistance of 10 MΩ or more with
±2 % accuracy.
Test
1. Start the Prismaflex control unit, let it pass initialization test and
be in Setup mode.
2. Measure the resistance between the conductivity clip and the

connector for potential equalization with the multimeter.
3. Check that the resistance is:
1.1 MΩ ± 0.2 MΩ for type BF applied part.
3.24 MΩ ± 0.15 MΩ for type CF applied part.
ELT / PLT
Test equipment
A safety tester set to measure according to IEC 60601–1.
General conditions for ELT / PLT

1. Connect the Prismaflex control unit to the outlet supply of the
safety tester. Use a mains plug adapter for respective mains plug.
2. Measure the supply voltage with the safety tester and register the
value in Record of ESI - Machine identification - Supply voltage -
Measured.
3. Connect conductivity clip on the Prismaflex control unit via access

point and Applied Part jack on the tester.
Note:
To avoid damages on the safety tester, follow the user manual for the
safety tester.
4. No other external equipment than specified in this instruction

should be connected to the Prismaflex control unit.
5. The protective earth of the Prismaflex control unit must not be in

contact with any external protective earth.
6. No potential equalization cable shall be connected during test.

ELT - Earth Leakage Current Test
be in Setup mode.
2. Measure the earth leakage current, Normal Condition, with the

safety tester by running Earth Leakage Current test. Test also with
reversed polarity of supply voltage.
3. Measure the earth leakage current, Single Fault Condition, with the
safety tester by running Earth Leakage Current test. Test also with
4. Check that the highest measured readings don’t exceed the limit
values in following table:
Limit values for ELT

Prismaflex BF or CF, 230 VAC, Normal Condition Max 500 μA
Prismaflex BF or CF, 230 VAC, Single Fault Condition Max 1000 μA
Prismaflex BF or CF, 115 VAC, Normal Condition Max 250 μA
Prismaflex BF or CF, 115 VAC, Single Fault Condition Max 500 μA

PLT - Patient Leakage Current Test
Use conductivity clip via any reliable connection of the testers probe
to the clip as PLT access point.
Test
be in Setup mode.
2. Measure the patient leakage current, Normal Condition, with the

safety tester by running Patient Leakage Current test. Test also
3. Measure the patient leakage current, Single Fault Condition, with

the safety tester by running Patient Leakage Current test. Test also
4. Check that the highest measured readings don’t exceed the limit
values in following table:
Limit values for PLT

Prismaflex CF, 230 VAC, Normal Condition Max 10 μA DC, max 10 μA AC
Prismaflex CF, 230 VAC, Single Fault Max 50 μA DC, max 50 μA AC
Condition
Prismaflex CF, 115 VAC, Normal Condition Max 10 μA DC, max 10 μA AC
Prismaflex CF, 115 VAC, Single Fault Max 50 μA DC, max 50 μA AC
Condition
Prismaflex BF, 230 VAC, Normal Condition Max 10 μA DC, max 100 μA AC
Prismaflex BF, 230 VAC, Single Fault Max 50 μA DC, max 500 μA AC
Condition
Prismaflex BF, 115 VAC, Normal Condition Max 10 μA DC, max 100 μA AC
Prismaflex BF, 115 VAC, Single fault Condition Max 50 μA DC, max 500 μA AC

Record of Electrical Safety Inspection
Machine identification
Product code
Serial number
Run time (h)
Classification
(BF/CF)
Supply voltage _________VAC (nominal) _________VAC (measured)
Visual inspection
Description Approved check

A visual inspection of the Prismaflex-machine has
been performed without any remarks, according to the ⃞
specified step instruction in section “Visual inspection”.
Remarks:
Conductivity Clip Test
Description Approved
Measured value
check
Check that the resistance between the Applied part:
conductivity clip and the connector for
potential equalization is according to
section Check of Conductivity Clip, in
this chapter. __________ ⃞
(Limit value type BF applied part: 1.1
MΩ ± 0.2 MΩ)
(Limit value type CF applied part: 3.24
MΩ ± 0.15 MΩ) ____________ MΩ

PET - Protective Earth Test
Check Approved
Description Measured value
no check
Check that the resistance between
the protective earth connection
of the mains plug and the earth
1 ⃞
connector at the bottom plate
where the scales are attached is
≤ 300 mΩ. _________mΩ
2 of the mains plug and the earth ⃞
connector at the PCB holder at the
door is ≤ 300 mΩ. __________mΩ
3 of the mains plug and the earth ⃞
connector at the ARPS pump is
≤ 300 mΩ. __________mΩ
4 of the mains plug and the ⃞
earth connector for potential
equalization is ≤ 300 mΩ. __________mΩ
ELT - Earth Lekage Current Test
Measured value
check
File the highest measured earth leakage
current, normal condition reading
according to section ELT-Earth Leakage
⃞
Current Test, in this chapter:
(Limit value 230 VAC: max 500 μA)
(Limit value 115 VAC: max 250 μA) __________ μA
File the highest measured earth leakage,
single fault condition reading according
to section ELT-Earth Leakage Current
⃞
Test, in this chapter:
(Limit value 230 VAC: max 1000 μA)
(Limit value 115 VAC: max 500 μA) __________ μA

PLT-Patient Leakage Current Test
Measured value
check
File the highest measured patient
leakage current, normal condition
reading according to section
PLT-Patient Leakage Current Test, in __________ μA DC
this chapter: ⃞
(Limit value CF, 115 or 230 VAC: max
10 μA DC, max 10 μA AC)
(Limit value BF, 115 or 230 VAC: max
10 μA DC, max 100 μA AC) __________ μA AC
File the highest measured patient
leakage current, single fault
condition reading according to
section PLT-Patient leakage Current __________ μA DC
Test, in this chapter: ⃞
(Limit value CF, 115 or 230 VAC: max
50 μA DC, max 50 μA AC
(Limit value BF, 115 or 230 VAC: max
50 μA DC, max 500 μA AC) __________μA AC
Compare with the measured leakage currents at the last ESI1 and make
a judgment if the changes are approved or not for the next operational
period of the machine. Write notes here:
This record is to be signed and filed by the service engineer

responsible for the electrical safety inspection.
Name of testing organization Date
____________________ ____________________
Name of testing service engineer Signature
____________________ ____________________
1If this is the ESI at installation please make comparison with the "Production
Summary" measured values supplied by the manufacturer at delivery of the

Component replacement with needed ESI
If one or several of following components are changed, an ESI shall be
performed to ensure proper function of the Prismaflex system:
• Power Supply
• Main Switch
• Display
• Pinch Valves
• Venous Clamp
• Speaker & Fan Assembly
• Bar Code Reader
• Loader Motor
• Slave Pump Bracket
• Blood Pump
• Scale Plate
• ARPS Pump
• Syringe Pump
These components has a direct contact with the protective earth.

Preventive Maintenance
The Preventive Maintenance (PM) for the Prismaflex control unit
should be performed on a regular basis. PM is required every 6000
hours of operation or once per year whichever occurs first. Upcoming
as well as overdue maintenance procedures are signalled to the operator
through a reminder screen at the startup of the control unit. Always
refer to alarms and troubleshooting in the Service manual related
to the actual software revision for details. Only authorized service
technicians are allowed to perform preventive maintenance.
Complete the PM checklist (SPI) as the tests are performed.
PM kit always contains latest version of instruction and checklist.
CAUTION
Make sure to have proper electrostatic safety device
(i.e. wrist grounding straps or grounding mats) in place to prevent
damage to electrostatic sensitive components inside the
Prismaflex control unit.
CAUTION
Tools Needed
• Torx T-20
• Torx T-15
• 8 mm Hex
• Flat blade screwdriver
• Pair of long nose pliers
• PC (Personal Computer)
• Prismaflex calibration weights
• Effluent line from a Prismaflex disposable set
• Return line from a Prismaflex disposable set
• Digital Multi Meter (DMM), calibrated
• Current leakage/ground resistance tester, calibrated
• 20, 30 or 50 ml luerlock syringe
• Pressure meter, calibrated
• Pressure calibration tube, or similar
• Prismaflex disposable set

• Catheter (8F) for achieving a simulated treatment with correct
pressures.
• 4 fluid bags (saline or equal) of minimum 1000 ml each.
• Stopwatch
• ESI equipment, calibrated
Note: Do not to use power screwdrivers or drills when mounting

internal components anywhere on the control unit. Damage to standoffs
and/or other plastic components is likely.
Working Time
• Replacement: 30 minutes
• Final check: 90 minutes
Prismaflex® PM Kit
• Blood pump dampers, 2 pcs
• Slave Pump dampers, 8 pcs
• Pressure pod sealing cones, 4 pcs
• Battery for PC 104 board
• ARPS pump segment, 1 pce
• 130 Micron air filter, 1 pce
• PM procedure, 1 pce
• PM checklist, 1 pce
• PM sticker (Next Preventive Maintenance) 2 pcs

Visual Inspection and Cleaning
1. Disconnect the Prismaflex control unit's power cord from the wall
socket.
2. Open the rear panel using the 8 mm Hex tool.
3. Clean any dust, debris, and/or dried fluids from the external and
internal Prismaflex control unit surfaces, including the fan outlet,
rear panel inlet, bottom plate (covering the scales) and pump rotors.
Note: Clean spills from the surface of the Prismaflex control unit using
a mild detergent (Never use detergents with germicides).
4. The tubing path through the blood leak detector should be cleaned
as required to remove liquid or other debris. Using a flossing
action, clean inside the detector with a lint-free cloth and 70%
isopropyl alcohol. Dry thoroughly when finished.
5. Verify the proper operation of all wheels and brakes.
6. Verify that there are no mechanical obstructions around the scale

hooks and handles.
7. Inspect the Prismaflex control unit for the following and replace
as necessary:
• Cracked pressure sensor housings
• ARPS tube set, check for kinks, short or damaged tubes
• Broken tubing guides
• Filter set holder
• ABD, including Door
• Return line clamp
• Pinch valve, including Pinch pins
• Damaged syringe pump components
• Damaged power cord or plug
• Loose internal electrical connectors
CAUTION
Do not use sodium hypochlorite (Bleach®) to clean the pump crank.
Use of sodium hypochlorite (Bleach®) on this component may
damage it.
To clean the touch screen use the following disinfectants: Isopropyl
alcohol (70°) Sodium hypochlorite solution (active chlorine from
50,000 to 60,000 ppm)/Bleach diluted with water at a ratio of 1:50.
CAUTION

In the event of a blood leakage from a pod diaphragm or if blood
has reached the membrane of the return fluid barrier, following the
instructions below:
Blood leakage from the pressure pod diaphragm (Access and Filter)
1. Clean the external surface involved using a towel dipped in a
disinfectant solution.
2. Replace the involved pressure sensor assembly(ies) and visually

inspect for blood residuals. If blood residuals are present, replace
the Pressure Pod Assembly.
3. Test the Prismaflex control unit.
Blood reached the Return fluid barrier

See the Operator's Manual, section Fluid Barrier Related Procedures.
If Blood/infusion solution has passed through the fluid barrier and

reached the return pressure port, follow instructions below:
1. Clean the external surface involved using a towel dipped in a
disinfectant solution.
2. Replace the Return Pressure Pod Assembly
3. Test the Prismaflex control unit.

Component Replacement
1. PC 104 Board Battery
1.1. Make sure that the Prismaflex control unit is switched off.
1.2. Open the rear panel using an 8 mm Hex key.
1.3. Loosen the Torx screw (T-20) holding the plate where the
PIB board is mounted.
1.4. Swing out the bracket where the PIB board is mounted to
access the PC board.
1.5. Push the mental retaining tab outward and remove the
battery from its socket.
1.6. Insert the new battery onto the board (ensure that the +
polarity side of the battery faces outward).
2. Replace the Pressure Pod Sealing Cones (4 cones)
2.1. Remove the sealing cone from each transducer port (access,
filter, effluent and 5th).
2.2. Visual inspection of all pressure transducer protectors for

traces of blood, clean if needed.
2.3. Install new sealing cones so that they are sealed around the
tip of the transducers, with the enlarged part of the transducer
port protruding through the seal. Never use lubricant!
3. Replace the dampers in the Blood Pump Rotor
3.1. Use a T-20 to remove the Blood Pump Rotor.
3.2. Replace the two dampers on the Rotor and reinstall it on

4. Replace the dampers on the Slave Pump Rotor
4.1. Use a flat blade screw driver to remove the Slave pump
Rotor.
4.2. Compress the rotor by hand and use a pair of long nose
pliers to remove the old dampers.
4.3. Compress the rotor and push the new dampers over the
screw head with your fingers.
Note: Do not adjust the screws.
4.4. Remount the rotor
4.5. Continue from step 1 until all rotors has been updated.

5. Emptying the Technical Data Card
5.1. Exchange the card or download the data on the technical

data card to a PC. Check with local personnel if the data
is needed.
5.2. Erase the content of the card and put it back into the
6. Automatic Reposition System Filter and Pump Segment
6.1. Loosen the four Torx screws (T-20) on the back of the ARPS
pump housing and remove the pump assembly.
6.2. Separate the two halves of the pump and remove the old
pump segment.
6.3. Remove the tubing connector from the pump segment. Save
the tubing connector for use on the new pump segment.
Dispose the filter and pump segment.
6.4. Install the new pump segment by carefully working it under

each of the rollers in one-half of the housing assembly.
Re-assemble the pump housing halves. The segment should
be centred in the housing assembly.
6.5. Ensure that the female slot of the ARPS pump assembly
lines up properly with the male slot on the ARPS motor
collar. Secure the pump housing assembly to the ARPS
bracket with the four screws.
Note: Start the four screws by hand. Make sure the threads on the
screws grip properly before applying any force on to the screw.

6.6. Reconnect the tubing connector (removed in step 3) and
install the new filter on the pump segment so that the filter
(large end up) is on the left (next to ARPS circuit board) and
the tubing connector is on the right.
6.7. Verify that the ARPS tubes between the pressure pods are
not kinked, dry, or too short. If this is the case, replace the
tubing.

Power Supply Check
Turn on the Prismaflex control unit. Wait for the Query or the
Setup screen and verify the following values:
Test Point Signal Name Tolerance

PIB Board
TP14 & TP3 +5VD 5.1 to 5.3 V
TP15 & TP3 +12V 11.9 to 12.3 V
TP13 & TP3 -5V -5.4 to -5.1 V
TP16 & TP3 +24Vm 22.8 to 25.2 V
Carrier Board
TP2 & TP4 +5VD 5.0 to 5.3 V
Battery
Plus & minus connector CB (12V battery) 13.0 to 14.0 V
Plus & minus connector CB (24V battery) 27.5 to 28.8 V
Exchange of Lead Batteries for Battery Backup

Per the battery manufacturer, the expected battery life is from 3 to 5
years for all backup batteries (both available types: +12v and +24v).
Under normal use and storage premises, changing the batteries every
third year will ensure operation according to specification. Battery
change is guidance only; not changing every third year will not
interfere with patient safety.

Service Mode - Checkout using Service Diagnose
Mode
Enter Service – Diagnose mode (see Service Screens on page 6:22 for
more information) and verify the proper operation and/or calibration
of the components listed below:
• Pumps
• Scales
• Pressures - Pod Reposition
• Alarms Tone and Lights
• Air detector
• Syringe Pump
• Clamp and Pinch Valves
• BLD
• Internal
• Communication
• PM Timer and Date
• Clean screen
• SW configuration
If any of the items are out of calibration/specification, calibrate and/or

replace as needed to correct the problem. Then, take a photograph of
the bar code and send it to Gambro.

Service Screens
The service screens contains menu- and softkey-driven screens
regarding calibration/diagnose procedures, on-line monitoring and
testing of the main Prismaflex control unit components and systems.
The service screens are divided into:
• Diagnose Screens
• Calibration Screens
Enter the service screens by pressing the time, displayed on the upper
right corner of the touch screen. This can only be done at the initial
start up screen.
CAUTION
Only an authorized service technician should access the Service
mode.
CAUTION

The Service Mode screen appears. Enter the service code
and press ENTER softkey. The CALIBRATE, DIAGNOSE, the
RECOVER ENGLISH and RESTART softkeys are highlighted and can
be selected.
The RECOVER ENGLISH softkey is used for restoring the default
English language on the Prismaflex control unit. (The Service mode
is translated in the same language used for the Treatment mode). The
technician must re-boot the Prismaflex control unit to allow the English
language configuration file loading.
The RESTART softkey allows the service technican to go back to the
Prismaflex start screen

Service - Diagnose Screens
By pressing the DIAGNOSE softkey, screens similar to the pictures
below, are displayed. Use the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to enter the
different diagnose screens. Follow the instructions given on the screens
to verify the proper diagnostic. If the verification fails, calibrate the
component and redo the verification. If the error remains replace the
component.
The EXIT or the CONFIRM ALL softkey appears on every

Service-Diagnose screen. Each time the EXIT or the
CONFIRM ALL softkey are pressed, the Prismaflex control unit returns
to the initial Service-Diagnose screen.

Diagnose Screen – Pumps Diagnose
Data displayed on the screen are:
TACH: value in rpm read by the Protective side

SET: rpm set by the user with the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys
rpm range is:
-90 to +90 for blood pump
-250 to 250 for the other pumps
Note: This is the maximum measurable range.
pumps might grind if speed of 200 or more is selected and the brake is turned
on/off, select a value between 180 to 200 and –180 to -200
Sensor A number of pulses accumulated for sensor A

(count):
Sensor B number of pulses accumulated for sensor B
(count):
Time A-B delay between the time in which the magnet (on the rotor) closes the circuit of the
(ms): sensor A (on the stator) and the time in which the magnet closes the circuit of the
sensor B (on the stator)
Time B-A time between B and A (as described above)
(ms):
Encoder: value in rpm read by the Protective side, based on encoder signal

Verify the functionality of the Pumps
1. Select the pump to be tested by pressing one of the
BLOOD, EFFLUENT, PBP, DIALYSATE or REPLACE softkeys.
Note: Two or more motors can be tested simultaneously.
2. Press the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys and release it when the

desired pump speed is displayed in the SET row on the screen. The
pump will start as soon as the ARROW softkey is released. The
TACH speed should be the same as the SET speed (±10%).
Note: For blood pump the TACH and the Encoder value should be
the same as the SET speed (±10%).
3. Once the pump is running, press the DOWN ARROW softkey to

decrease the set speed again. The TACH speed value should still be
the same as the SET speed (±10 %).
4. The counterclockwise direction is obtained by selecting a

negative number for rpm. Once the pump is running, press the
DOWN ARROW softkey to decrease the SET motor speed until a
negative value is reached. Release the arrow button. Again, the
TACH speed should be the same as the SET speed (±10%).
Note: Pressing the UP ARROW softkey increases the pump motor

speed clockwise and pressing the DOWN ARROW softkey decreases
the motor speed. (The pump motor speed is indicated in rpm, a
negative value indicates counterclockwise direction).
5. Disabling the 24 VDC (pressing 24 VOLTS ON softkey) must stop

the pumps. Pressing the 24 VOLTS OFF must restart the pumps.
6. Press the BRAKE BLOOD softkey. The softkey changes to

UNBREAK BLOOD and the blood pump must stop. Press the
UNBREAK BLOOD, the blood pump must restart at the same
SET rpm.
7. Press the BL. RELAY ON softkey. The softkey changes to

BL. RELAY OFF and the blood pump must stop. Press the
BL. RELAY OFF softkey, the blood pump must restart.
Note: Pumps shall not be started at full speed. If a pump is started

at full speed, pump motor stalls and causes a loud buzzing sound.
Slightly decrease the rpm value from highest setting and the pump
will start normally.

Diagnose Screen – Scale Diagnose
The screen displays the averaged scale readings for the control and
protective Weight Transducers, and the associated A/D values. The
weight and A/D values at each Weight Transducer are continuously
displayed in the row below the scale name.
Data displayed in the screen are:
Control A/D: A/D value read by the channel used for the control side
Protective A/D value read by the channel used for the protective
A/D: side
Ref1 A/D and voltage references connected to 2 A/D channel
Ref2 A/D:
Control weight in grams read by the control side with the actual
grams: calibration parameters
Protective weight in grams read by the protective side with the
grams: actual calibration parameters
Switch: is the indication about the status of the switch (scale
open / scale close)

Verify the functionality of the Scales
1. Remove any weight on the scale.
2. Verify that the values on the screen are within the accepted values
defined in “Accepted values for scale verification” below.
Accepted values for scale verification

No 5.2 kg calibration 7.0 kg calibration
weight weight (part A+B) on weight (part A+B,
on scale scale C+D) on scale
Control A/D 84 000 – 103 700 – 110 450 110 000 – 116 750
93 750
Protective 55 050 – 38 350 – 45 100 32 050 – 38 800
A/D 64 800
Control 0 ±7g 5200 ±7g 7000 ±7g
grams
Protective 0 ±7g 5200 ±7g 7000 ±7g
grams
3. Place the calibration weight (part A+B) on the scale and monitor
the values. Verify that the values on the screen are within the
accepted values defined in “Accepted values for scale verification”.
4. Place the calibration weight (part A+B, part C+D) on the scale
handle and monitor the values.
seen above in “Accepted values for scale verification”.
6. Gently press down the scale by hand until the Protective Grams
and Control Grams on the screen shows approximately 9000g.
7. Release the scale.
defined in “Accepted values for scale verification”.
9. Gently lift the scale by hand until the Protective Grams and Control
Grams on the screen shows approximately 5000g.
10. Release the scale.
defined in “Accepted values for scale verification”.
12. Repeat step 3–9 for all scales.

Diagnose Screen – Pressure Pod Reposition
The screen displays the averaged pressure readings in mmHg and the
associated A/D values. It also shows the status of the five valves.
mmHg: pressure indication of associated valve in mmHg

A/D: A/D value read by the channel
Value is the indication about the status of the valve
Status: (Open / Closed)
Repo. ARPS pump

Transducer:
Motor Increase / Decrease
direction:
Verify the functionality of the Pressure Pods

1. Install the pressure calibration/test tube on each of the pressure pod
housings and securely onto the return pressure port.
2. Press the ACCESS VALVE softkey to open the access reposition

valve and allow the pressure applied at the access pressure pod to
register on both the reposition and access transducers.
3. With the pressure monitors open to the ambient atmospheric

pressure, the pressure must read 0 ±4 mmHg and A/D should read
512 ±20.

4. To verify that all the valves are able to open, press the
ASSOCIATED softkey. The softkey will be highlighted and the
valve for the repositioning system will open. Check that each of
the valves are opened one at a time.
5. Apply a pressure of -350 mmHg to all the pressure sensors. Verify

that the pressure value is equal to the pressure measured by the
manometer ±35 mmHg and verify that the A/D value is 162 ±35.
6. Apply a pressure of +450 mmHg to all the pressure sensors. Verify

that the pressure value is equal to the pressure measured by the
manometer ±45 mmHg and verify that the A/D value is 962 ±35.
Verify ARPS Repositioning

10. Press the ACCESS VALVE softkey. The softkey will be high lighted
and the access pressure valve will open.
11. Press the DIRECTION softkey until the Motor Direction row
displays Decrease, then press the MOTOR softkey to begin
changing the pressure.
12. When the valve pressure displayed reaches approximately -350

mmHg, press the MOTOR softkey again to stop the pump. The
Reposition Press. display should decrease at the same rate
as the valve pressure display, and should be approximately the
same value.
13. Repeat 10 – 12 for all the valves.

Diagnose Screen – Alarms Tone and Light
The screen displays the different lights and alarm sounds that are
present in the Prismaflex control unit.
Verify the functionality of the Alarm tones and Lights

1. Press the WARNING TONE softkey.
High sound, 10 sound pulses repeated approx. every 8 seconds
should be heard.
2. Press the MALFUN. TONE softkey.

High Sound, 10 sound pulses repeated approx. every 8 seconds
should be heard.
3. Press the CAUTION TONE softkey.

Medium sound, 3 sound pulses repeated approx. every 11 seconds
should be heard.
4. Press the ADVISORY TONE softkey.

Low sound, 2 sound pulses repeated approx. every 21 seconds
should be heard.
5. Press the CONTROL TONE softkey.

A light tone indicating touch screen response should be heard.
6. Press the WARNING LIGHT softkey.

The red lamp will flash.
7. Press the MALFUN. LIGHT softkey.

The red lamp will flash.

8. Press the CAUTION LIGHT softkey.
The yellow lamp will flash.
9. Press the ADVISORY LIGHT softkey.

The yellow lamp will be lit permanently.
10. Press the GREEN LIGHT softkey.

The green lamp will be lit permanently.

Diagnose Screen – Air Detector
This screen is used for verifying the functionality of the ABD (Air
Bubble Detector).
Verify the functionality of the Air Detector

1. Install a fluid-filled tube from a Prismaflex disposable set, in the
Air Bubble Detector housing.
• The Line switch should show Line Detect
2. Press the SET AIR PRESENCE softkey to simulate a macro-size

air bubble.
• The Protective Macro Bubble row should display

YES or briefly display YES, indicating that the system has
detected a macro-size bubble. The Trouble row should
display YES.
• The Line switch should show Line Detect.

3. Press the SET AIR PRESENCE softkey once again.
• The Protective Macro Bubble row should display NO.
• The Trouble row should display NO.

Diagnose Screen – Syringe Pump
This screen is used for verifying the different functionalities of the

Syringe Pump.
Data displayed on the screen are:
Force Applied: is the actual force applied to the syringe plunger clamp calculated by the
actual calibration coefficients
ADC value: is the AD value read by the syringe pump
End of Stroke: Normal = no end of stroke Eos
Eos Up = end of stroke up (not working for all types of clip holders) Eos
Eos Down = end of stroke down
Overload: this field indicates when a overload condition is reached. The overload
threshold is a value syringe dependent
Syringe state: indicates if the syringe is loaded or not loaded
Syringe indicates the actual condition of the syringe pump and can assume the
Functioning: following values:
Not present. – if the syringe is not installed in its holder
Loading. – if the syringe pump is loading the syringe
Wai. Hepar. – if the syringe pump is waiting for automatic
heparinisation
Adaptation – when the heparinisation starts Normal, in working
condition
Protective mm/s read by the Protective side. In the new software version the unit
rate: is mm/s
Manual mode indicates if the mode is disabled or enabled reading the status of the syringe
and Automatic pump
mode:
Counter: this is the number of encoder pulses measured during movement in the
upwards direction, when the syringe pump is in Manual mode

Set rate: is the rate set by the arrow buttons
Syringe Brand Selectable in Custom mode
Syringe Size Configured in Service - Calibrate - Syringe Holder Configuration
Identification of stroke length
Note: To be performed after change/installation of Syringe pump
and/or software updates.
1. Use the syringe pump hard keys to move the carrier to

its bottom position. Verify that the the screen shows
End of stroke: Eos Down.
2. Use the syringe pump hard keys to move the carrier

to its top position. Verify that the screen shows
End of stroke: Eos Up and Force Applied: 0 g.
3. Use the syringe pump hard keys to move the carrier to

its bottom position. Verify that the the screen shows
End of stroke: Eos Down.
Weight verification (Carrier should be in central position)

1. Remove the syringe from the syringe plunger.
2. Hang the calibration weight (Part A + Part B + Part C + Part D =

7000 g) on the plunger as shown in the picture below.
3. Confirm that Force applied on the screen is between 6800

g and 7200 g.
4. Remove the weight from the syringe plunger.
5. Confirm that Force applied on the screen is between -200

g and +200 g.

Syringe State Verification
1. Enable the Manual mode by pressing the
MANUAL ENABLE softkey.
2. Lower the plunger by pressing the down key.
3. Place a syringe with at least 15 ml of water, in the holder.
4. Connect the luer connection to a Prismaflex disposable set or an

unused effluent bag in order to get some resistance in the pump
movement and adjust the plunger to the 15 ml mark.
5. Press the up key to load the syringe properly and close the syringe
latch. The message Syringe state: Loaded should
appear.
6. Disable the Manual mode by pressing the

MANUAL DISABLE softkey.
Automatic Microbolus Verification

1. Perform Syringe State Verification above.
2. Enable the Automatic mode by pressing the

AUTOMAT. ENABLE softkey.
3. Press the ADJUST RATE softkey. Use the UP/DOWN ARROW soft-
keys on the right side of the screen. Set the delivery rate for the
syringe pump to 0,018 mm/s. The rate can be set between 0 and
0.5 mm/s.
4. Press the MICRO BOLUS and the CONTINUOUS softkey.

Depending on set rate value it may take some time before the
microbolus is activiated.
Continuous Delivery Verification

2. Enable the Automatic mode by pressing the

AUTOMAT. ENABLE softkey.
3. Press the ADJUST RATE softkey. Use the UP/DOWN ARROW soft-
keys on the right side of the screen. Set the delivery rate for the
syringe pump to 0,018 mm/s. The rate can be set between 0 and
0.5 mm/s.
4. Press the CONTINUOUS softkey and start the stopwatch. Verify

that in 12 minutes the syringe pump delivers the quantity of
anticoagulant listed in the table:

Syringe Volume (ml) Internal Delivery ml/h
Diameter (ml/12 min)
Fresenius Injectomat 50 29 8.6 42.8
Terumo 50 29 8.6 42.8
B. Braun (Perfusor) 50 28 6.7 39.9
B. Braun (Omnifix) 50 27.9 7.9 39.6
Codan Luer Lock 50 27.7 7.8 39.1
Kendall Monoject 50 26.6 7.2 36.0
BD Plastipak 50 26.4 7.1 35.5
Terumo 30 23.3 5.5 27.6
B. Braun (Omnifix) 30 22 4.9 24.6
BD Plastipak 30 21.7 4.8 24.0
B. Braun (Omnifix) 20 20.2 4.2 20.8
Kendall Monoject 20 20.1 4.1 20.6
Terumo 20 20 4.1 20.4
BD Plastipak 20 19 3.7 18.4
5. When the syringe pump is operating, the displayed value for

the Protective rate changes, indicating that the monitor
microprocessor is receiving the stepper motor signal increments.
The Protective rate and the Set rate should be the
same.
6. When the delivery rate accuracy is verified, press the STOP softkey.

Automatic Bolus Verification
2. Enable the Automatic mode and press the BOLUS softkey and start
the stopwatch at the same time.
3. The syringe pump should deliver a 5 ±0.5 ml bolus in a time

reported in the table:
Syringe Volume (ml) Internal Delivery

Diameter time (sec.)
Fresenius Injectomat 50 29 15
Terumo 50 29 15
B. Braun (Perfusor) 50 28 16
B. Braun (Omnifix) 50 27.9 16
Codan Luer Lock 50 27.7 17
Kendall Monoject 50 26.6 18
BD Plastipak 50 26.4 18
Terumo 30 23.3 23
B. Braun (Omnifix) 30 22 26
BD Plastipak 30 19 27
B. Braun (Omnifix) 20 20.2 31
Kendall Monoject 20 20.1 32
Terumo 20 20 32
BD Plastipak 20 19 35
Prime verification
2. Enable the Automatic mode and press the PRIME softkey.
3. Verify that approx. 1 ml has been delivered.

Diagnose Screen – Clamp and Pinch Valves
This screen is for verifying the functionality of the Clamp and the
Pinch Vales.
Verify the functionality of the Clamp

1. Press the CLOSE CLAMP softkey to close and open the line clamp.
2. Make sure the clamp is open. Press the CONTROL POWER softkey.
The clamp should close and the Clamp status display
should also indicate a closed reading. The display related to the
CONTROL POWER softkey should indicate OFF.
3. To open the clamp, press the CONTROL POWER softkey until the
display reads ON.
4. Press the PROTECT POWER softkey. The clamp should close

and the Clamp status display should also indicate a closed
reading. The display related to the PROTECT POWER softkey
should indicate OFF.
5. To open the clamp, press the PROTECT POWER softkey until the
display related to the softkey reads ON.

Verify the functionality of the Lower Pinch Valve
6. Lower Pinch valve: Install a tubing segment from a
Prismaflex disposable set in the lower pinch valve. Press each
position softkey (LO. PINCH PRE, LO. PINCH NEUTRAL,
and LO. PINCH POST) and verify that the pinch valve changes to
the correct position.
Verify the functionality of the Upper Pinch Valve

7. Upper Pinch valve: Install a tubing segment from a
Prismaflex disposable set in the upper pinch valve. Press each
position softkey (UP. PINCH DIAL, UP. PINCH NEUTRAL, and
UP. PINCH POST) and verify that the pinch valve changes to the
correct position.

Diagnose Screen – BLD (Blood Leak Detector)
This screen is for verifying the functionality of the BLD.
Note: The Normalize value that appears after the NORMAL. softkey
is pressed is stored only for use during the current Service mode. The
Blood Leak Detector Normalize value is re-calibrated and stored
during the Prime Self-Test.
Tools needed: Effluent tubing segment from a Prismaflex disposable set
Verify the functionality of the Blood Leak Detector

1. Remove the tubing segment from the holder and press the
NORMAL. softkey.
2. Verify that the PWM Normal Value is <15%.
3. Install an empty tube in the BLD holder and press the

NORMAL. softkey (wait until the PWM Normal Value is
updated).
4. Press the TEST softkey, this will generate a

Malfunction: Prime Self Test (code 18).
5. Verify that the PWM transmitter is >30%. Press the

NORMAL. softkey.
6. Fill the tubing segment with water and install it in the blood leak
detector housing.
7. Press the NORMAL. softkey.
8. Wait for BLD normalization. Verify that the transmitter PWM is in

the range <45% and that the normalization value is 43500 ±1500.

Diagnose Screen – Internal
This screen is for verifying the functionality of the Bar code reader
and Loader.
Verify the functionality of the Loader

Note: Both when the LOAD and UNLOAD softkey is pressed, all the
pumps run clockwise (CW). If the loader is in the inner position press
the UNLOAD softkey to get it back to the outer position.
1. Press the LOAD softkey. The cartridge loader clamp should be in

the “out” position. Pressing the softkey should cause the cartridge
loader to retract, and the pumps should turn in the proper direction.
2. Press the UNLOAD softkey and verify that the pumps turn
clockwise and that the cartridge clamp loader moves in the
appropriate direction.
Verify the functionality of the Bar Code Reader

3. Load a Prismaflex disposable set. Pressing
the BAR CODE TEST softkey the label read must appear
in the Bar code label row.
4. If the bar code reader is not able to read the label the
following text appears Bar code label: Er. Press the
BAR CODE CONFIG softkey: a different bar code reader
configuration is set. Retry to press the BAR CODE TEST softkey.
5. Press the UNLOAD softkey and verify that the pumps turn
clockwise and the set is unloading.
6. Remove the set.
Note: The VIDEO TEST softkey is not yet implemented.

Diagnose Screen – Communication
This screen is for verifying the external communication. This section

should only be performed if an external communication is connected.
Note: A PC and software for reading data coming from RS232,

Ethernet, are necessary to perform the following tests.
After each test is verified, release the corresponding softkey.

TEST RS 232 (When applicable)
Verify the Test RS 232

1. Press the TEST RS232 softkey. The above screen is displayed.
2. Verify on the PC that the message transmitted from the

Prismaflex control unit is according to the following table;

RS 232 TEST Field Description
1 STX Constant value
2 CRC CRC of the message sent

3 Prismaflex control unit Identifier Numerical value used to identify the
Prismaflex control unit by the clinical
software
4 Clinical SW identifier Not implemented
5 Message counter Not used in a service message; this is used
to combine question and its answer
6 Command code Not implemented
7 Message information Number of record in message body
8 Flags Field for Boolean values
9 Patient ID No patient is selected in Service mode
10 SW revision Prismaflex SW revision
11 Therapy type In Service mode no therapy is selected so

the value is NOT CHOSEN
12 Therapy status Not therapy is selected, but user is in Service

mode STATO CALIBRATION
13 Time Current time
14 Message body length Number of records sent

TEST Ethernet (When applicable)
Verify the Test Ethernet

1. Press the TEST ETHERNET softkey; the screen above is displayed.
2. Connect an Ethernet cable between the Ethernet port on the

Prismaflex control unit and the Ethernet port on PC.
3. Verify on PC the message transmitted from Prismaflex control unit.

Ethernet Test Field Description
1 STX Constant value
2 CRC CRC of the message sent
3 Prismaflex control unit Identifier Numerical value used to identify the
Prismaflex control unit by the clinical
software
4 Clinical SW identifier Not implemented
5 Message counter Not used in a service message; this is
used to combine question and its answer
6 Command code Not implemented
7 Message information Number of record in message body
8 Flags Field for Boolean values
9 Patient ID No patient is selected in Service mode
10 SW revision Prismaflex SW revision
11 Therapy type In Service mode no therapy is selected
so the value is NOT CHOOSEN
12 Therapy status Not therapy is selected, but user is in
Service mode STATO CALIBRATION
13 Time Current time
14 Message body length Number of records sent

TEST PCMCIA
Verify the TEST PCMCIA

1. Make sure that a technical data card is inserted in the card reader
before the Prismaflex control unit boots-up. If the technical data
card is not inserted, switch off the Prismaflex control unit, insert a
technical data card and switch on the Prismaflex control unit again.
Enter the Service – Communication screen.
2. Press the TEST PCMCIA softkey, the screen above is displayed.
3. Wait for data download.
4. Switch off the Prismaflex control unit and remove the technical
data card from its reader.
5. Read data stored on the technical data card and verify that a *.LOX
file is located in folder for current year. The *.LOX file shall have
a time stamp that corresponds to the time displayed on screen.
File name is interpreted in the following way (1XZC6J7I.LOX used

as an example):
File name is based on following structure:
SSSYMDHM.* (time is based on download time)
• SSS Device serial (Base36, zero padded)
• Y Year since 2000 (Base36)
• M Month (Base36)
• D Day (Base36)

• H Hour of day (Base36)
• M Last even minute of hour (Base36)
The file used as an example gives following values:
1XZ = 2519 (serial number of the Prismaflex control unit)
C = 12 (Year 2012)
6 = June
J = 19
7 = 7 (7 AM)
I = 18
Copied file comes from a Prismaflex control unit with serial number
2519 and time for the download was 7:18, 19th of June, 2012.

TEST REMOTE CONTROL
Verify the TEST REMOTE CONTROL (When applicable)

1. Press the REMOTE CONTROL softkey.
2. Verify that the red status light is on.
3. On the remote alarm device, verify that alarm light and/or buzzer
is activated.

Diagnose Screen – PM timer and Date
This screen is used for setting the Last PM Date and the time interval
for PM advisory. See section “Preventive Maintenance” on page 6:13.
Calendar shows the interval time for the next occurrence of the Advisory "Preventive
Timer: Maintenance Due" and is setable in the range between 1 month and 5 years
with steps of 1 month
Operation This interval is setable in the range between 500 hour and 6000 hour
Timer:
Last PM shows the date of the last service intervention
Date:

Verify the PM Timer and Date
1. Press the CALENDAR TIMER softkey to see the current setting
for the Advisory “Preventive Maintenance Due”. Use the
UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to modify the setting.
2. Press the OPERAT TIMER softkey to set the next occurrence

of the Advisory “Preventive Maintenance Due”. Use the
UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to modify the setting.
3. Press the SAVE PM DATE softkey to save the current date. The
date is stored as the Last PM Date.

Diagnose Screen – Clean Screen
This screen disables the softkeys on the screen for 10 seconds in order
to clean the screen.
1. Press the DISABLE KEYS softkey to display a white screen without

any softkey.
2. The white screen without any softkeys will be displayed for

approximately 10 seconds.

Diagnose Screen – SW Configuration
Verify the SW Configuration

This screen displays, for each of the listed items, the revision level and
the CRC value path, of the application and of the booter.

Diagnose Screen – 2D Barcode
Bar code
The bar code contains information about the setup and configuration of
the machine, such as hardware/software configuration and calibration
parameters.
The bar code gives valuable information for troubleshooting and

complaint handling.
Photograph the bar code

Use a digital camera to be able to take a photograph of the bar code
and send it to Gambro. Take the photograph straight from the front. It
is important there are no reflections caused by the flash or other light
near the display.

Service Calibration Screens
By pressing the CALIBRATE softkey, screens similar to the pictures
below, are displayed. Use the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to enter
the different calibration screens. Follow the instructions given on the
screens to verify the proper calibration.
If the calibration fails, repair or replace the affected component/item.
If any items are out of calibration, calibrate and/or replace as needed to
correct the problem.
The EXIT or the CONFIRM ALL softkey appears on every

Service-Calibrate screen. Each time the EXIT or the
CONFIRM ALL softkey are pressed, the Prismaflex control unit returns
to the initial Service-Calibrate screen.

Calibration Screen – Language Configuration
Install a Language Package

1. Open the back of the Prismaflex control unit (use the 8 mm Hex)
and insert the Prismaflex Language Medium into the reader.
2. Press INSTALL softkey to start copying language package from

medium to Prismaflex control unit.
3. Remove medium. Restart the Prismaflex control unit.
Configure the Language

1. Use the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to select requested language
and press the CONFIRM softkey to confirm the selection.
2. Wait until a confirmation message is displayed.
3. Restart the Prismaflex control unit.

Calibration Screen – Scales Calibration
3-Point Calibration Procedure

A 3-point calibration procedure is used to calibrate the scales.
The recommended weights are:
• first point 0 g
• second point 5200 g
• third point 7000 g
Tools needed: a reference weight
WARNING
The used calibration weight must correspond to the weight set in
the Service – Scales screen ( Part A + Part B = 5200 g
and Part C + Part D = 1800 g).
Failure to use the corresponding weight at the second and third
calibration point can cause serious injury or death to the patient.
WARNING
Calibrate the Scale

1. Select the scale to be calibrated by pressing the softkey.
2. Make sure the scale is closed during the calibration.
3. Wait for the scale to stabilized for the first calibration point, 0 g.
Press CONFIRM when the message Scale STABLE appears.
4. Place the recommended weight on the selected scales middle hook.

(If another reference point than 5200 g is chosen, place the weight
on the selected scale and enter the weight of reference using the
UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys.)

5. Press CONFIRM when the message Scale STABLE appears.
6. Let the 5200 g weight hang on middle hook and place the 1800
g weight on one of the selected scales outer hooks. (If another
reference point than 7000 g is chosen, place the weight on
the selected scale and enter the weight of reference using the
UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys.)
7. Press CONFIRM when the message Scale STABLE appears.
Note: If the values read from the scale at the first cali-
bration point are outside the valid intervals, the message
Scale out of tolerance, cannot be calibrated ap-
pears on the screen. In this case the scale is damaged, and needs to
be replaced.
If the values read from the scale at the second or third calibration point
are outside the valid intervals, check that the correct weight is used.
Then make sure that the correct weight value is entered and press the
RETRY softkey.
Verify the Scale
8. Gently press down the scale (approx. + 2 kg) by hand and then
release the scale again.
9. Wait for the Scale STABLE message, press CONFIRM softkey.
10. Gently lift up the scale (approx. – 2 kg) by hand and then release
the scale again.
11. Wait for the Scale STABLE message, press CONFIRM softkey.
12. Repeat for all the scales.
When a correct calibration has been performed, the message

CALIBRATION COMPLETE appears on the screen.

Adjust Bag Tare Limit
1. Press BAG TARE LIMIT softkey.
2. In Service - Bag Tare Limit screen, press

BAG TARE LIMIT softkey and use UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to
modify tare weight for Fixed Empty Bag method.
3. Press EXIT softkey to save the new value and return to

Service - Scales screen.

Calibration Screen – Pressure Sensors Calibration

The 3-point calibration procedure is used to calibrate all the six
pressure transducers; Access, Effluent, Filter, Return, 5th Pod and
Reposition transducer.
Recommended pressure values are:
• first point = 0 mmHg
• second point = +400 mmHg
• third point = -400 mmHg
Tools needed: pressure calibration tube, a pressure reference

instrument, 3 - way stop cock with luer connections and a syringe to
apply pressure.
WARNING
If calibration fails repeatedly, replace the pressure sensor.
WARNING
Calibrate the Pressure Sensors

1. Select all the pressure sensors by pressing the ALL PODS softkey.
2. Wait for the sensor to stabilize for the first recommended

pressure, 0 mmHg. Press CONFIRM when the message
Sensor STABLE appears.
3. Attach the pressure calibration tube.
4. Apply the second recommended pressure (+400 mmHg).

5. Wait for Sensor STABLE message. Press CONFIRM.
6. Enter reference value using the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys

(range - 500 to 500 mmHg). Press CONFIRM.
7. Apply the third recommended pressure (-400 mmHg). Press

CONFIRM.
8. Wait for Sensor STABLE message. Press CONFIRM.
9. Enter reference value using the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys

(range - 500 to 500 mmHg). Press CONFIRM.
10. CALIBRATION COMPLETE appears on the screen.
11. If the test fails, repeat the above for all the pressure sensors one at
a time.
Note: To calibrate the reposition transducer, the pressure must be

inserted from the access pod. The access reposition valve opens when
the REP TRAN softkey is pressed.

Calibration Screen – Syringe Pump Calibration

Tools needed: a reference calibration weight between 7000 and 9999
g. The weight must be put on the syringe plunger clamp and must not
touch the Prismaflex control unit.
WARNING
The used calibration weight must correspond to the weight set in
the Service – Syringe Pump screen (Part A + Part B +
Part C + Part D = 7000 g).
Failure to use the corresponding weight at the second calibration
point can cause serious injury or death to the patient.
WARNING
Calibrate the Syringe Pump

1. Remove any syringe from the Syringe holder.
2. Move the plunger clamp to the same level as the tubing guide
for the Effluent and PBP line, use the up/down arrow hard keys,
located above the syringe pump.
3. Wait for the ADC value to stabilize.
4. With the ADC value stable, press the CONFIRM FIRST softkey.
5. Hang the calibration weight (Part A + Part B + Part C + Part D =

7000 g) on the plunger according to the picture.

6. Use the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to enter the reference weight.
7. Wait for the ADC value to stabilize.
8. Press the CONFIRM SECOND softkey to confirm the second

calibration value.
9. CALIBRATION COMPLETE appears on the screen.
10. Note: After change/installation of the Syringe pump and/or

software updates, “Identification of stroke length” must be
performed. See section ”Diagnose Screen – Syringe Pump”
starting on page 6:36.
Reset offset
1. Remove any weight from the Syringe plunger.
2. If the Weight Applied is different from zero, press

ZEROING to reset the syringe offset.
The ADC value represents the value read by the syringe pump (AD
Converter) when a weight is applied. The ADC value is displayed
on the screen.
The syringe pump slave uses an AD Converter with 10 bits so the

AD value can assume values between 0 and 1023. If the value read
from the pump at the first calibration point is outside the valid interval,
the message Syringe pump out of tolerance, can not
be calibrated appears on the screen. In this case the pump is
damaged and must be replaced.
If the value read from the pump at the second calibration point is
outside the valid interval, most probably a wrong calibration weight is
used, and both the message;
Calibration failed. Check weight on plunger
and retry appears on the screen, and a new softkey RETRY becomes
available. Before pressing the RETRY softkey, check that the correct

weight is used and that the correct weight value is entered on the
screen. The calibration coefficients are calculated inside the slave with
the 2 AD values read.
Calibration Screen – Filter Clotting Limits
In this screen it is possible to adjust filter clotting limits, by changing

the value of the TMP Increase (Trans Membrane Pressure). The
TMP determines when the Advisory “Filter Clotting” occurs.
The TMP value is calculated by;
TMP = TMPinitial + TMPincrease
Set the Filter Clotting Limits

1. Press the TMP INCREASE softkey.
2. Use the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to modify the value;

low flow filters: 50–100 mmHg
high flow filters: 50 –80 mmHg

Calibration Screen – Set Clock and Date
Set the Clock and Date

1. Press the softkey corresponding to the parameter to be changed.
2. Use the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to adjust the displayed value.
3. The DISPLAY ORDER softkey changes the way the current date is
displayed: day/month/ year or month/day/year

Calibration Screen – Screen Brightness Calibration
Set the Screen Brightness

Use the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to modify the screen brightness.

Calibration Screen – Pitch and Volume
Set the volume and alarm tone to one of the following values: LOW,
MODERATE or HIGH.
Default values are:

• Alarm Volume = HIGH
• Alarm Pitch = HIGH
Set the Pitch and Volume

1. Press the softkey of the desired setting.
2. Use the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to modify the setting.

Calibration Screen – External Communication Interface
Set the parameters related to the external communications.
• ID: this parameter is the setable Prismaflex control unit identity; a

numerical value between 0 to 255 can be entered.
• Master Timer: this is the time between two subsequent

transmissions in a one-way protocol. The time is selectable in the
range between 5 to 60 seconds.
• RS232 = this parameter is used to enable or disable the RS232

communicator.
• Remote Control: displays the Remote Control label. The

options associated with the Remote Control label can be either
visual or auditory.
Default values
• ID = 10
• Master Timer = 10 seconds
• RS232 = NO (disabled)
Configure the External Communication Interface

2. Use UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to modify the setting.

Calibration Screen – Therapy/Sets Configuration
On the Therapy/Sets Configuration screen it is possible to

unlock/lock different therapies. To unlock a therapy a password is
required (different passwords for different therapies). The password is
provided by Gambro Support, based on the Monitor ID (shown on the
screen above) and on which therapy to be unlocked. All the therapies
on the screen are locked by default.
Configure the Therapy

1. Enter the password for the therapy to be unlocked, press ENTER.
2. The therapy, the UNLOCK softkey and CONTINUE softkey are

activated.
3. Unlock the therapy. Repeat 1–3 to unlock several therapies.
4. Press CONTINUE to proceed with enabling/disabling therapies. A

new screen appears.

Configure the Set
Note: Before enabling a set in the
Service – CRRT Sets configuration screen, verify
that the selected disposable set has been registered and can be sold
in your own country.
1. Press the therapy to Enable (only the therapies that are

unlocked are activated in the bottom of the screen), use
UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to modify.
2. When a therapy is selected, the therapy SETS softkey is activated.
3. Press the chosen therapy SETS softkey. A new screen appears.
Note: For HP, there is a HP CARTS (HP cartridges) softkey instead

of a SETS softkey.

4. Press the softkey of the desired set(s) to Enable/Disable. Use
the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to modify.
5. Press EXIT to save the new configuration and return to the

Service - Therapy/Set Configuration.
Note: For HP, Enable/Disable the desired HP cartridge(s).

Enabling Adsorba 150 or Adsorba 300 will enable both the Adsorba
set and the HP-X set. Enabling user defined HP cartridges will enable
the HP-X set.

Calibration Screen – Anticoagulation Configuration
On the Anticoagulation Configuration screen it is

possible to unlock the anticoagulation methods Citrate or
CitrateCalcium. To unlock the methods a password is required.
The password is provided by the Gambro Support and based on the
Monitor ID (shown on the screen above) and the method intended
to unlock.
Configure the Anticoagulation

1. Enter the password for the therapy to be unlocked, press ENTER
2. The method and the softkeys UNLOCK and CONTINUE are

activated.
3. Unlock the method. Press CONTINUE. A new screen appears.

4. Choose the CITRATE or the CITRATECALCIUM softkey.
5. Press the therapy softkey to Enable/Disable. Use

6. Press EXIT to save the new configuration and return to the

Service - Therapy/Set Configuration.

Calibration Screen – Anticoagulation Solutions
CAUTION
This Service mode section must be restricted to medical authorized
personal. Critical parameters to be customized will be calculated by
the Prismaflex system and are relevant to the patient safety. Check
with physicians for proper setting of parameters.
CAUTION
Configure the Anticoagulation Solutions

1. Select the therapy for setting (only the enable therapies are
selectable), by pressing the softkeys at the bottom of the screen.
A new screen appears.

2. Chose the CITRATE or the CALCIUM softkey.
CITRATE
3. When the CITRATE softkey is pressed, the softkeys
SOLUTION 1, 2, 3 are activated.
4. For each SOLUTION softkey it is possible to make five different

settings, one default and four undefined.
5. Press one of the softkeys SOLUTION 1, 2, 3, choose default or

undefined setting, using the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys. When
the SOLUTION 1, 2, 3 is pressed the DISPLAY SOLUTION softkey
is activated.
6. The DISPLAY SOLUTION softkey opens a new screen where it is

possible to view and edit the solution composition.

7. If needed, press the EDIT SOLUTION softkey to edit the solution.
The default setting is not editable.
8. The softkeys SOLUTION ID, CITR BAG VOLUME, CITRATE and

CITRIC ACID is activated and it is possible to edit the solution.
Note: There are different ranges available for different available

therapies.
9. Adjust the settings, use the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to

modify. Press CONFIRM ALL when adjustment is completed.
10. If needed, repeat 3 - 11 for each of the SOLUTION 1,2,3 softkeys.
11. Press CONFIRM ALL to save the new configuration.
12. The screen Verify Anticoag. Solutions appears.

13. Review the values on the screen. If needed, press the
ANTICOAG. SOLUTIONS softkey to adjust values.
CALCIUM
14. When the CALCIUM softkey is pressed, the softkeys
SOLUTION 1, 2, 3 are activated.
15. For each SOLUTION softkey it is possible to make five editable

settings.
16. Press one of the softkeys SOLUTION 1, 2, 3, use

17. When the SOLUTION 1, 2, 3 is pressed the

DISPLAY SOLUTION softkey is activated. The
DISPLAY SOLUTION softkey opens a new screen where
it is possible to view and edit the solution composition.

18. If needed, press the EDIT SOLUTION softkey to edit the solution
composition.
19. The softkeys SOLUTION ID, and CALCIUM CONC. are activated
and it is possible to edit the solution.
20. Adjust the settings, use the UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to

modify. Press CONFIRM ALL when adjustment is completed.
21. If needed, repeat 14 - 21 for each of the SOLUTION 1,2,3 softkeys.
22. Press CONFIRM ALL to save the new configuration.
23. The screen Verify Anticoag. Solutions appears.

24. Review the values on the screen. If needed, press the
ANTICOAG. SOLUTIONS softkey to adjust values.

Calibration Screen – Serial Number
Change Serial Number
The current entry for the Serial Number is displayed.
1. Press the Serial Number softkey.
2. Use the soft key numbers to enter the serial number found at the
label at the back of the machine. Some Control units have letters
before the serial number on the type label and they are not entered.

3. Press Enter
Note: The entry for serial number is deleted (set to zero) during a
software update.
Calibration Screen – Air Detector
Tools needed: Prismaflex disposable set return line tube filled with
fluid.
Calibrate the Air Detector

1. Insert a fluid filled blood line in the ABD sensor, close the door.
2. Press the START CALIB. softkey.
3. If the UABD tolerance value is Out of tolerance, the

Air Bubble Detector (UABD) must be replaced.

Calibration Screen – IP Settings
Note: Changes about IP address and/or Subnet Mask will be

active after the Prismaflex control unit restarts.
Set the IP Address/Subnet Mask/Gateway

2. Use the numerical keyboard. Press ENTER softkey to store new

value.

Calibration Screen – Syringe Holder Configuration
The configuration must be performed by an authorized service

technician.
Configure the Syringe Holder

2. Use UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys to modify.

Calibration Screen – Supplementary Syringe
Configure the Supplementary Syringe

1. Press the softkey of the desired setting and follow the instructions.
Graduated Length
Measure and enter the length between graduation marks that correspond
to the Syringe Size (e.g. the distance between 0 ml and 50 ml if
the size of the syringe is 50 ml). Use UP/DOWN ARROW softkeys
to set the value.

End Position
Open the plunger clamp latch and press the MOVE DOWN softkey.
Place the syringe in the holder, insert its wings into the holder's slot.
Press the MOVE UP softkey.
Verify that the End Position is displayed as OK.
2. Press the CONFIRM ALL softkey to confirm the settings and return
to the Service – Calibrate screen.

Calibration Screen – Settings Handling
On the Settings Handling screen it is possible to export/import

custom settings to/from the technical data card as well as to reset
custom settings to manufacturer’s default settings.
Custom settings can only be shared between Prismaflex control units

with same SW revision and specific custom settings are imported only
if custom settings are unlocked.
When upgrading several machines at a clinic, make sure that all

machines have same custom settings unlocked. Thereafter enable
disposable sets, blood warmer, customize anticoagulation solutions,
customize HP cartridges and other custom settings. When all settings
are made, use export customs settings and import settings on remaining
Prismaflex control units. After restart of the Prismaflex control unit all
custom settings are active.
Export Custom mode settings

1. Insert a technical data card in the holder on rear panel of the
2. Press EXPORT CUSTOM softkey.
3. Remove the technical data card.

Import Custom mode settings
1. Insert the technical data card in its holder on rear panel of the
2. Press IMPORT CUSTOM softkey.
3. Press CONFIRM softkey to proceed with the import or

CANCEL softkey to return back to main screen.
4. Remove the technical data card.
Reset Custom mode settings

1. Press RESET SETTINGS softkey.
2. Press CONFIRM to proceed with the reset back to manufacturer’s

default settings or CANCEL to return back to main screen.

Calibration Screen – Blood Warmer Configuration
On the Blood Warmer Configuration screen, installed blood

warmer shall be configured.
To unlock a blood warmer a password is required. The password is

provided by the Gambro Support, based on the Monitor ID (shown
on the screen above) and on which blood warmer to be unlocked.
Prismatherm II and sleeve warmers are unlocked by default.
Configure the blood warmer

1. Enter the password for the blood warmer to be unlocked, press
ENTER.
2. The blood warmer, the UNLOCK softkey and CONTINUE softkey

are activated.
3. Unlock the blood warmer. Repeat 1–3 to unlock several blood

warmers.
4. Press CONTINUE to proceed with enabling/disabling of unlocked

blood warmers. A new screen appears.

5. Press the blood warmer to enable (only the blood warmers that are
unlocked are activated in the bottom of the screen).
6. Press EXIT to save the new configuration.
Configuration will activate Connect Blood Warmer screen in

Setup mode if the blood warmer needs to be included in the priming
sequence.

Functional Test
Before releasing the Prismaflex control unit for use, perform the
functional checkout procedure. The test is performed using saline
solution as a substitute for priming, pre-blood, replacement and
dialysate solutions, and a container, or bag of water as a substitute for
the patient. Successful completion of the functional checkout indicates
that the Prismaflex control unit is operating properly.
WARNING
A patient must not be connected to the Prismaflex System during
the functional checkout. Be sure that the checkout is conducted
using a container of water to substitute for the patient.
If a Malfunction alarm occurs during the functional checkout, the
Prismaflex control unit has failed the checkout. Do not use the
Prismaflex System until the problem has been corrected and the
Prismaflex System has passed the checkout.
WARNING
Supplies needed:
• Prismaflex CRRT set
• 4 fluid bags (saline solution) 1000 ml each
• 1 fluid container 1000 ml, filled with 500 ml tap water
1. Turn on the Prismaflex control unit. The Prismaflex control unit

performs an initialization test to check the system electronics,
startup signal sounds twice and status lights (green, red and yellow)
are lit during the test.
2. In the Prismaflex system screen, press the CONTINUE softkey.

If the Query screen is displayed instead of the Set-up screen,
select the NEW PRIME softkey and confirm it in the following
screen.
3. Choose NEW PATIENT when the Choose Patient screen

appears, confirm New Patient choice by pressing CONTINUE on
the Enter Patient Info screen. Select the
CVVHDF THERAPY softkey when the Choose Therapy screen
appears.
4. Choose NO ANTICOAGULATION as anticoagulation method.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen to load and prime the

Prismaflex disposable set. Use saline solution as a substitute to
priming and dialysate solutions. The Prismaflex control unit
performs multiple self-tests during the priming cycle.
6. When the prime and the prime test are completed, press
CONTINUE. The Enter Treatment Settings screen
appears. Set the Loss/Gain Limit to 140 ml/3h. Press
CONFIRM ALL.

7. The Enter Flow Settings screen appears. Set the following
flow rates and press the CONFIRM ALL softkey.
Blood: PBP: Dialysate: Replacement: Fluid Removal Rate:

180 ml/min 1100 ml/h 1200 ml/h 1300 ml/h 200 ml/h
8. When the Review Prescription screen appears, verify the
above flow rates, then press CONTINUE.
9. When the Connect Patient screen appears, place the access

and return lines preferably connected through an 8F catheter into
the container of water. Press CONTINUE.
10. The Verify Patient Connection screen appears. Press

the START softkey, to enter Run mode.
Note: Because the installation test is performed with

water, the Warning: Return Disconnection and
Advisory: Cannot Detect Return alarms could occur
after the Prismaflex control unit has entered Run mode. If this alarms
occurs, press CONTINUE/OVERRIDE (depending on active alarm)
and continue with the test. The alarms will not affect the outcome of
the installation test.
11. Note the hour and minute on the Status screen when the
Prismaflex control unit enters Run mode (this information can be
found in History screen, pressing Events softkey).
12. Let the Prismaflex control unit run for at least 15 minutes.
13. Place a clamp on the access line (red) below the cartridge.
The Warning: Access Pressure Extremely
Negative alarm should occur. Verify that the red light is flashing
and the audible alarm sounds with a high sound, 10 sound pulses
repeated approx. every 8 seconds.
14. Unclamp the access line and press the CONTINUE softkey on
the Warning screen. Verify that the alarm is cleared (Warning
screen leaves display, green light is lit).
15. Check the Battery Backup function.

Note: Performed only if the Prismaflex control unit has Battery
Backup installed. See section “Third Technical Screen” on page
4:32, Power section. Otherwise continue with step 19.
Disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. The
Advisory: Main Power Lost alarm should occur. Verify
that the yellow light is permanently lit and the audible alarm
sounds with a low sound, 2 sound pulses repeated approx. every
21 seconds.
16. Press the OVERRIDE softkey. The Advisory screen leaves the
display, but remains in Examine Alarms. Yellow light is lit, the
Prismaflex control unit returns to the Status screen and the battery
icon, in the top right corner of the display, is lit.

17. Connect the power cord to the wall socket. Verify that the battery
icon disappears and that the Prismaflex control unit continues
in run mode. Verify that the alarm is cleared from the Examine
Alarms (press SYSTEM TOOLS softkey and verify that the
EXAMINE ALARMS softkey is not present) and green light lit.
18. Press the STOP softkey, then press the END TREATMENT softkey
and follow the instructions to unload the set.

Final Check
1. Verify update of PM intervention in the
Service Diagnose screen on the Prismaflex control unit.
2. Fill in the PM sticker and apply to the Prismaflex control unit.
3. Document the service in the Log Book of the Prismaflex control

unit and in the service report system. Together with the service
report, document the Prismaflex control unit configuration with
either of the following:
- Download the logging data of the simulated treatment (LOX

file) from the technical data card, and attach it to the GFS record.
- Download the logging data of the simulated treatment

(LOX file) from the technical data card, and email it to
barcode@gambro.com.
- Take a photo of the barcode in Service mode according to

instructions in Service - Diagnose, 2D Barcode, and send it to
barcode@gambro.com.
Verify that the Preventive Maintenance checklist is filled in.

File a copy of the checklist with the appropriate hospital and
manufacturer/distributor personnel.


Chapter 7
Schematics
G5005209 Schematics 7:1

The following pages shows wiring diagrams over the Prismaflex control
unit with all internal connections between the different subunits.
7:2 Schematics G5005209

Chapter 8
Specifications
Contents
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Flow Rates and Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Blood Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Automatic Blood Return Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Replacement Solution/Fluid Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Dialysate Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
PBP Solution Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:4
Patient Fluid Removal Performance / Patient Plasma Loss
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:4
Effluent Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:4
Syringe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:5
Systemic, Prismaflex syringe pump anticoagulation method . . . 8:5
Citrate – Calcium, Prismaflex Syringe Pump anticoagulation
method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6
TPE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6
Pressure sensor range, accuracy and alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7
Effluent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9
Patient safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9
Air Bubble Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9
Blood Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9
Alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Sound pressure levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Visual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Physical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Weight, dimensions, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Scales Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Scale Weight Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Scale accuracy: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Line power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:12
External communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:12
Environmental data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:13
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:13
Transportation and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:13
Noise level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:13
Vibration levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Fluid spillage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Cleanability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Electromagnetic Emissions and Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
AC Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
Defibrillation-proof Applied Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
G5005209 Specifications 8:1

Radio Frequency Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
Potential Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20
Continuous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20
Conformity to International Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:21
Medical Device Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:22
Prismaflex® Disposable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:23
CRRT Disposable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:24
Low flow sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:24
Priming parameters and Blood flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:24
Patient fluid removal and Patient fluid loss/gain limit . . . . . . . . 8:24
Solution flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:25
Return Blood and Recirculation flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:25
High flow sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:26
Patient fluid removal and Patient fluid loss/gain limit . . . . . . . . 8:26
Solution flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:27
TPE Disposable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:28
Low flow sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:28
High flow sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:29
HP Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:30
Priming parameters and Blood flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:30
Return Blood and Recirculation flow rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:30
8:2 Specifications G5005209

Performance
Flow Rates and Accuracy

Flow rate ranges and increment depend on the Prismaflex therapy/set
combination selected by the operator. Details are listed in tables after
section “Prismaflex® Disposable Sets” on page 8:23.
Blood Flow Rate
Range 10 to 450 ml/min

Increment 2 to 10 ml/min
Accuracy ±10 % of user-set rate (at nominal
blood flow of 450 ml/min or the highest
achievable disposable blood flow, having
37 ºC, at an access pressure of -200
mmHg and without any PBP flow).
Return Blood Flow Rate 6 to 100 ml/min
When START RETURN softkey is pressed
Recirculation Flow Rate 20 to 100 ml/min
Automatic Blood Return Volume
Range 50 to 150% of the disposable set volume

(rounded to closest 5 ml in End mode)
Increment 5% (5 ml in End mode)
Accuracy ±15%
Replacement Solution/Fluid Flow Rate
CVVH; CVVHDF
Range 0 to 8000 ml/h
Increment 20 to 50 ml/h
CVVH
Predilution percentage 0 to 100%
Increment 5%
CVVHDF
Predilution percentage 0 (postdilution) or 100% (predilution)
TPE
Increment 10 ml/h
Accuracy ± 30 ml/h
Dialysate Flow Rate
CVVHD; CVVHDF
Increment 50 ml/h
Accuracy ± 30 ml/h

PBP Solution Rate
CRRT
TPE; HP
Note: Total PBP Volume is 2000
ml/treatment for TPE and HP.
Increment 30 ml/h < Qpbp < 100 ml/h: 2 ml/h
100 ml/h < Qpbp < 200 ml/h: 5 ml/h
200 ml/h < Qpbp < 1500 ml/h: 10 ml/h
Qpbp > 1500 ml/h: 50 ml/h
Qpbp = PBP Solution Flow Rate
Accuracy ± 30 ml/h
Patient Fluid Removal Performance / Patient Plasma Loss

Performance
CRRT
Increment 5 to 10 ml/h
TPE
Increment 10 ml/h
Accuracy ±30 ml/h
±70 ml/3 hr
±300 ml/24 hr
Scales calibrated at ambient temperature
at which they will be used. Ambient
temperature change less than ±3 °C (5.4
°F) during treatment.
Effluent Flow Rate
Range 0 to 10,000 ml/h

Depending on the therapy selected.

Syringe Settings
Systemic, Prismaflex syringe pump anticoagulation method
Syringe Continuous Delivery Rate
Range User controllable;

0, or 0.5 to 5.0 ml/h (20 ml syringe)
Increment 0.1 ml/h
Accuracy ±15 % < 2 ml/h, ±5 % ≥ 2 ml/h (20 ml
syringe)
±10 % < 2 ml/h, ±5 % ≥ 2 ml/h (30 ml
syringe)
±10 % < 3 ml/h, ±5 % ≥ 3 ml/h (50 ml
syringe)
Pressure between 0 and +600 mmHg.
Use of approved syringes
Syringe Bolus Delivery Volume
Range User controllable;

0, or 0.5 to 5.0 ml (20 ml syringe)
0, or 0.5 to 5.0 ml (all syringe sizes,
recirculation mode)
Increment 0.1 ml
Accuracy ±15 % < 2 ml, ±5 % ≥ 2 ml (20 ml
syringe)
±10 % < 2 ml, ±5 % ≥ 2 ml (30 ml
syringe)
±10 % < 3 ml, ±5 % ≥ 3 ml (50 ml
syringe)
Syringe Bolus Delivery Interval
Range User controllable; Once every 1 to 24

hours Note: Immediate option also
available in Run mode and Recirculation
mode.
Increment 1 hour
Syringe Bolus Delivery 1 ml/≤20 sec

Rate Use of approved syringes

Citrate – Calcium, Prismaflex Syringe Pump anticoagulation
method
Syringe continuous delivery rate
Range 0, or 2.0 to 100 ml/h

Increment Not applicable
Accuracy 7%
TPE Settings
Patient Hematocrit
Range 10 to 60%
Increment 1%
Default 30%
Total Replacement Volume
Range 0 to 10,000 ml
Increment 100 ml
Default 3000 ml
Replacement Container Volume
Range 0 to 5,000 ml
Increment 10 ml
Pressure sensor range, accuracy and alarm limits
Access
Operating Range –250 to +450 mmHg

Accuracy ±15 mmHg
“Access Extremely Warning alarm occurs

Negative” Warning Limit Pressure in access pod equals warning
limit.
User controllable:
–10 to –250 mmHg
Default: –250 mmHg
150 mmHg below operating point
Increment: 5 mmHg
“Access Extremely Warning alarm occurs

Positive” Warning Limit Pressure in access pod equals warning
limit.
User controllable:
+10 to +450 mmHg
Default: +300 mmHg
Increment: 5 mmHg

“Check Access” Advisory Advisory alarm occurs
Limit When running with an operating point
below –10 mmHg, this alarm occurs
if access pressure is 50 mmHg or 70
mmHg (if blood flow>200 ml/min)
above or below its operating point, or
if the pressure rises above 0 mmHg.
When running with an operating point
in the range between –10 mmHg and
+20 mmHg, this alarm occurs if the
access pressure is 50 mmHg or 70 mmHg
(if blood flow>200 ml/min) below its
operating point, or if the access pressure
is 10 mmHg above its operating point.
When running with an operating point
above +20 mmHg, this alarm occurs if the
access pressure drops below +10 mmHg.
Return

Accuracy ±5 mmHg
“Return Extremely Warning alarm occurs

Positive” Warning Limit User controllable;
+15 to +350 mmHg
Default: +350 mmHg
Increment: 5 mmHg
Pressure in return deaeration chamber
equals warning limit.
“Check Return” Advisory Advisory alarm occurs

Limit This alarm occurs if return pressure is 50
mmHg (or 70 mmHg if blood flow >200
ml/min) above its operating point.
“Return Pressure Warning alarm occurs

Dropping” Warning Limit Pressure in the return deaeration chamber
is 50 mmHg (or 70 mmHg if blood
flow>200 ml/min) more negative than the
established operating point.
“Return Disconnection” Warning alarm occurs

Warning Limit Pressure in the return deaeration chamber
is lower than +10 mmHg and the
established operating point is higher than
+10 mmHg.
Filter

Accuracy ±15 mmHg

“Set Disconnection” Warning alarm occurs
Warning Limit Pressure in filter pod (immediately before
the filter) is lower than +10 mmHg.
“Filter Extremely Positive” Warning alarm occurs

Warning Limit Pressure in filter pod (immediately before
the filter) is ≥450 mmHg.
“Filter Is Clotting” Advisory alarm occurs

Advisory Limits One or both limits are reached. (CRRT)
a) Filter pressure drop a) User controllable;
+10 to +100 mmHg greater than initial
filter pressure drop Default: +100 mmHg
Increment: 10 mmHg
b) TMP increase b) Service controllable;
+50 to +100 mmHg greater than initial
TMP Default: +100 mmHg Increment:
5 mmHg
“Plasmafilter is Clotting” Advisory alarm occurs

Advisory Limit User controllable; Filter pressure drop
is +10 to +60 mmHg greater than initial
filter pressure drop Default: +60 mmHg
Increment: 10 mmHg
Limit is reached (TPE)
“HP Cartridge is Clotting” Advisory alarm occurs

Advisory Limit User controllable;
Filter pressure drop is +10 to +30 mmHg
(or one third of Max Pressure Drop for
user defined HP cartridges) greater than
initial filter pressure drop Default: +30
mmHg (or one third of Max Pressure
Drop for user defined HP cartridges)
Increment: 10 mmHg
Limit is reached (HP)
“Filter Clotted” Warning Warning alarm occurs

Limit Filter pressure drop is ≥ limit value fixed
for the filter in use, or both the “Filter
is Clotting” Advisory and the “TMP
Excessive” Caution limits are reached.
(CRRT)
“Plasmafilter Clotted” Warning alarm occurs

Warning Limit Filter pressure drop is ≥ limit value fixed
for the plasmafilter in use, or both the
“Plasmafilter is Clotting” Advisory and
the “TMPa Excessive” Caution limits are
reached. (TPE)
“HP Cartridge Clotted” Warning alarm occurs

Warning Limit Filter pressure drop is ≥ limit value fixed
for the HP cartridge in use.

“TMP Too High” Advisory Advisory alarm occurs User controllable;
Limit +70 to +350 mmHg Default: +350
mmHg Increment: 10 mmHg
TMP equals user-set limit. (CRRT)
“TMPa Too High” Advisory alarm occurs

Advisory Limit User controllable; 0 to +100 mmHg
Default: +100 mmHg Increment: 10
mmHg
TMPa equals user-set limit. (TPE)
“TMP Excessive” Caution Caution alarm occurs

Limit TMP > limit value fixed for the filter in
use (CRRT)
“TMPa Excessive” Caution Caution alarm occurs

Limit TMPa greater than a value automatically
calculated by the machine depending on
the blood flow rate and the plasmafilter in
use. (TPE)
Effluent
Operating Range –350 to +400 mmHg (CRRT)

–350 to +400 mmHg (TPE)
Accuracy ±15 mmHg
Patient safety
Air Bubble Detector
Macro air/foam detection Warning alarm occurs

The transducer receives one voltage
decrease of nominal signal level,
which corresponds to detecting a single
bubble/foam of approximately 20 μl.
Foam sensitivity was tested using bovine
blood. Air was injected into the pre-filter
blood line at a rate of 1 ml/ min creating
foam in the post-filter blood circuit.
Blood Leak Detector
Minimum blood leak Warning alarm occurs within 20 seconds

detection of detection.
Leak ≥0.35 ml/min at 0.25 Hct, for
effluent flow rate below 5500 ml/h Leak
≥0.50 ml/min at 0.32 Hct, at highest
effluent flow rate.

Alarm signals
The audible and visual alarm indicators meet IEC 60601-2-16.
Audible
Sound pressure levels
Default High volume, high pitch

Malfunction alarms 76 dB(A)
Warning alarms 67 dB(A)
Caution alarms 67 dB(A)
Advisory alarms 66 dB(A)
Characteristics
Can be silenced for 2 minutes, after which audible resumes if alarm
condition has not been remedied.
Fast beep Warning and Malfunction alarms

Moderate beep Caution alarms
Slow beep Advisory alarms
Unable to silence
Continuous for at least 2 Power loss

minutes
Visual
Red flashing Warning and Malfunction alarms
Yellow flashing Caution alarms
Yellow constantly lit Advisory alarms

Physical Data
Weight, dimensions, etc.

Weight: Approximately 78 kg (172 lb)
Without fluid bags and Prismaflex dis-
posable set
Height: Approximately 163 cm (64 in)
Width: Approximately 49 cm (19 in)
Base: Approximately 60 cm × 63 cm (24 in ×
25 in)
Scales Characteristics
Scale Weight Range
Weight range for each scale includes the scale components (bar tray,
carrying bars).
Dialysate: 0 to 11 Kg
Replacement: 0 to 11 Kg
PBP: 0 to 11 Kg
Effluent: 0 to 11 Kg
Scale accuracy:
≤7 g error for a mass from 0 to 5200 g and,
≤14 g error for a mass from 5201 g to 11000 g.
Power
Line power
Line Voltage: 100 – 240 VAC

Line Current: 5 – 2.5 A (5 A maximum RMS at 100
VAC, 2.5 A maximum RMS at 240 VAC)
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Power: 500 – 600 W
Average Energy <150 W (CVVHDF treatment)
Consumption:

Battery backup
Memory Backup 12 V / 1.2 Ah

Battery Backup 24 V / 2.9 Ah
The Prismaflex system will operate on battery backup for at least 10

minutes with healthy, fully charged batteries.
External communication
Remote Alarm Max voltage: 24 VAC
Max Current: 1 A
AMP CPC (Circular Plastic Connector),
4 pin, female connector
RS232 DB9–type, female connector
Ethernet 10base-T compatible
8 pin RJ45 female connector
Technical data card PCMCIA compatible memory card

Environmental data
Operation
Ambient Operating 16 °C to 38 °C
Temperature: (60 °F to 100 °F)
Ambient Operating 15% to 65% (Non-condensing)
Humidity (for control
units with serial number up
to PA5409):
Ambient Operating Lower ambient operating humidity
Humidity (for control limit:
units with serial number 15% (Non-condensing) in the temperature
from PA5410 and on): interval 16 °C to 38 °C.
Upper ambient operating humidity
limit:
85% (Non-condensing) in the temperature
interval 16 °C to 28 °C. In the temperature
interval 28 ºC to 38 ºC the upper limit
is reduced by 2% per degree and at
maximum ambient temperature (38 ºC)
the maximum operating relative humidity
is consequently 65% (Non-condensing).
Ambient Operating Air 70 to 106 kPa
Pressure: (525 to 795 mmHg)
Transportation and Storage

Transport and Storage –18 °C to +54 °C
Temperature: (0 °F to 130 °F)
Prior to use, let unit rest at ambient
operating temperature for 1 hour.
Transport and Storage 10% to 95% (Non-condensing)
Humidity:
Transport and Storage Air 50 to 106 kPa
Pressure: (375 to 795 mmHg)
Noise level
Noise level < 65 dB(A) over a 24 h period,
measured at a distance of 0.5 m from
the Prismaflex control unit, during
normal operation and without any alarm
condition.

Vibration levels
Vibrations during operation Acceleration Spectral Density (ASD),
isotropic, 2-200 Hz
ASD ≤ 5×10-8 g2/Hz
Fluid spillage
Fluid Spillage: IPX1 (Protection against vertically falling
water drops)
As specified in IEC 60529
Cleanability
Cleanability: Not damaged by mild detergent; liquid
soap; ethyl alcohol (90%); isopropyl
alcohol (70%); sodium hypochlorite
(0.1%). Pump rotors are removable.
Electromagnetic Emissions and Immunity

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration – Electromagnetic Emissions
The Prismaflex system is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment
specified below. The customer or the user of the Prismaflex system should ensure
that it is used in such an environment.
Emission Test Compliance Electromagnetic
Environment –
Guidance
RF emission CISPR 11 / Group 1 The Prismaflex system
EN 55011 uses RF energy only for
its internal function.
Therefore, its RF
emissions are very low
and are not likely to cause
any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
RF emission CISPR 11 / Class B The Prismaflex system
EN 55011 is suitable for use in
Harmonic emissions IEC Class A all establishments,
/ EN 61000-3-2 including domestic
establishments and those
Voltage fluctuations/ Complies directly connected to the
flicker emissions IEC / public low-voltage power
EN 61000-3-3 supply network that
supplies buildings used
for domestic purposes.

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration – Electromagnetic Immunity
Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Compliance Electromagnetic
Level Level Environment –
Guidance
Electrostatic ±6 KV contact ±6 KV contact Floors should be
discharge ±8 KV air ±8 KV air wood, concrete or
(ESD) IEC/EN ceramic tile. If
61000-4-2 floors are covered
with synthetic
material, the
relative humidity
should be at least
30%.
Electrical fast ±2 KV for power ±2 KV for power Mains power
transient / supply lines supply lines quality should be
burst IEC/EN ±1 KV for ±1 KV for that of a typical
61000-4-4 input/output lines input/output lines commercial
or hospital
environment.
Surge IEC/EN ±1 KV differential ±1 KV differential Mains power
61000-4-5 mode mode quality should be
±2 KV common ±2 KV common that of a typical
mode mode commercial
or hospital
environment.
Voltage dips, short <5% UT <5% UT Mains power
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) quality should be
voltage variations for 0.5 cycles for 0.5 cycles that of a typical
on power supply 40% UT (60% dip 40% UT(60% dip commercial
input lines IEC/EN in UT) for 5 cycles in UT) for 5 cycles or hospital
61000- 4-11 environment. If
70% UT (30% dip 70% UT (30% the user of the
in UT for 25 cycles dip in UT) for 25 Prismaflex system
cycles requires continued
<5% UT (>95% <5% UT (>95% operation during
dip in UT) for 5 dip in UT) for 5 power mains
sec. sec. interruptions, it
is recommended
that the Prismaflex
system be
powered from
an uninterruptable
power supply or a
battery.

Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency
(50/ 60 Hz) magnetic fields
magnetic field IEC should be at levels
/ EN 61000-4-8 characteristic
of a typical
commercial
or hospital
environment.
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration – Electromagnetic Immunity
Immunity IEC 60601 Com- Electromagnetic Environment –
Test Test Level pli- Guidance
ance
Level
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any
part of the Prismaflex system including
cables, than the recommended separation
distance calculated from the equation
applicable to frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted 3 Vrms 3 d = 1.2 √P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
RF 150 KHz to Vrms
IEC/EN 80 MHz
61000-4-6
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2 √P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
IEC/EN 80 MHz to d = 2.3 √P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
61000-4-3 2.5 GHz where “P” is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer
and “d” is the recommended separation
distance in meters (m). Field strengths
from fixed RF transmitters, as determined
by an electromagnetic site survey1, should
be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range2.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following
symbol:
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic
propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and
people.
1 Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio
(cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM
radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To
asses the electromagnetic environment due to fixed transmitters, an electromagnetic
site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in
which the Prismaflex system is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level
above, the Prismaflex system should be observed to verify normal operation. If
abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as
reorienting or relocating the Prismaflex system.
2 Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3
V/m.

Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF
communications equipment and the Prismaflex system
The Prismaflex system is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in
which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the
Prismaflex system can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a
minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment
(transmitters) and the Prismaflex system as recommended below, according to the
maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated Separation distances according to frequency of transmitter (m)
maximum 150 KHz to 80 800 KHz to 2.5 GHz
output 80 MHz KHz d = 2.3 √P
power of d = 1.2 √P to 800
transmitter MHz
(W) d = 1.2
√P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at maximum output power not listed above, the recommended
separation distance d in meter (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable
to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of
the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher
frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic
propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and
people.

Electrical Safety
CAUTION
Devices connected to the RS232 serial communication port or the
Ethernet port must comply with IEC 60950. Connected cables
must have a Kitagawa RFC-10 ferrite or equivalent to fulfill EMC
requirements.
CAUTION
Note! To be sure of the machine's classification see type label found at

the back of the Prismaflex control unit.
Classification: Mobile, Class I, applied part is Type CF,

defibrillation proof per IEC 60601-1
Mobile, Class I, applied part is Type BF,
defibrillation proof per IEC 60601-1
Mobile, Class I, applied part is Type
B, per IEC 60601-1 when using the
Prismaflex system in combination with
the MARS system.
AC Leakage Current
Protective ground open
300 μA maximum rms 100/115 VAC, 50/60 Hz
500 μA maximum rms 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Defibrillation-proof Applied Part

Applied part is Type CF, defibrillationproof per IEC 60601-1
Applied part is Type BF, defibrillationproof per IEC 60601-1
Defibrillator equipment meets requirements of IEC 60601-2-4
Radio Frequency Interference

Meets European Standard EN 55011, limit B
Meets IEC 60601-1-2
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Meets IEC 60601-1-2

Potential Equalization
Meets IEC 60601-1
The Prismaflex control unit has a connection for a Potential

Equalization Conductor.
See Rear Panel Components on page 3:14.
Continuous Operation
The Prismaflex system is intended for continuous operation.

Conformity to International Rules
IEC 60601-1:1988 Medical electrical equipment - Part 1:
General requirements for safety; incl.
A1:1991, A2:1995
IEC 60601-1-1:2000 Medical electrical equipment - Part
1-1: General requirements for safety -
Collateral standard: Safety requirements
for medical electrical systems
1-2: General requirements for safety -
Collateral standard: Electromagnetic
compatibility - Requirements and tests
1-4: General requirements for safety
- Collateral standard: Programmable
electrical medical systems
IEC 60601-2-16:1998 Medical Electrical Equipment - Part 2-16:
Particular requirements for the safety of
haemodialysis, haemodiafiltration and
haemofiltration equipment
IEC 60601-2-24:1998 Medical Electrical Equipment - Part 2-24:

Particular requirements for the safety of
infusion pumps and controllers
CAN/CSA No.601.1-M90
incl. S1-94 (R1999)
CAN/CSA No. 601.1B-90 Medical Electrical Equipment - Part 1:
(R2002) General requirements for safety
UL 60601-1 Medical electrical equipment - Part 1:
General requirements for safety

Medical Device Classification
Classification, EU Class II b per COUNCIL DIRECTIVE
93/ 42/EEC
Classification, USA Class II per FDA 21 CFR 876
Classification, Canada Class III per SOR/98-282
Classification, Australia Class II b per Therapeutic Goods Act
1989, Bill 2002

Prismaflex® Disposable Sets
Minimum blood flow range allowed by the monitor is 10 ml/min during
Run mode for all sets and therapies. Reported low blood flow range
limit refers to the minimum blood flow rate recommended for each set.
Maximum allowed flow rate values reported in this chapter are

absolute maximum possible settings for each individual flow. Available
maximum flow rate will be lowered in some therapy modes (i.e. pre-
or post-replacement infusion, SCUF) and with respect to the current
value of the other flow or anticoagulation settings.

CRRT Disposable Sets
Low flow sets
Priming parameters and Blood flow rates
Set Number Total Blood Blood flow Blood

of priming priming flow range increment volume
cycles volume (ml/min) (ml/min) (ml)
(ml)
M60 1 1000 50 to 180 5 93
ST60 1 1000 50 to 180 5 93
HF20 1 500 20 to 100 2 58
Patient fluid removal and Patient fluid loss/gain limit
Set Unintended Fluid Patient fluid Patient fluid

Loss or Gain limit removal range removal
(ml/3 h) (ml/h) increment (ml/h)
M60 60 to 200 0 to 2000 5
ST60 60 to 200 0 to 2000 5
HF20 60 to 150 0 to 500 5

Solution flow rates
Set Replace- Replace- Replace- Dialysate PBP flow

ment flow ment flow ment flow flow range range
range range increment (ml/h) (ml/h)
predilu- postdilu- (ml/h)
tion (ml/h) tion (ml/h)
M60 0 to 4000 0 to 3000 50 0 to 4000 0 to 2000
ST60 0 to 4000 0 to 3000 50 0 to 4000 0 to 2000
HF20 0 to 2500 0 to 2000 20 0 to 2500 0 to 1000
Return Blood and Recirculation flow rates
Set Return Default Return Recircula- Recircula-

Blood set value Blood tion flow tion flow
flow range for Return increment rate range rate in-
(ml/min) Blood (ml/min) (ml/min) crement
(ml/min) (ml/min)
M60 10 to 100 40 5 30 to 100 5
ST60 10 to 100 40 5 30 to 100 5
HF20 6 to 50 20 2 20 to 50 2

High flow sets

(ml)
M100 1 1000 80 to 400 10 152
ST100 1 1000 80 to 400 10 152
M150 2 2000 100 to 450 10 189
ST150 2 2000 100 to 450 10 189
HF1000 1 1000 80 to 400 10 165
HF1400 2 2000 100 to 450 10 186
oXiris 2 2000 100 to 450 10 189
septeX 1 1000 80 to 400 10 164
X-MARS* 1 2000 130 to 450 10 279
*The X-MARS kit on the Prismaflex control unit requires one single
priming cycle. Full priming of the X-MARS kit requires further
priming cycles from the MARS monitor. Refer to MARS® Liver
Support Therapy Operating Instructions and follow instructions on the
Prismaflex screen.
Patient fluid removal and Patient fluid loss/gain limit
Set Unintended Fluid Patient fluid Patient fluid

Loss or Gain limit removal range removal
(ml/3 h) (ml/h) increment (ml/h)
M100 100 to 400 0 to 2000 10
ST100 100 to 400 0 to 2000 10
M150 100 to 400 0 to 2000 10
ST150 100 to 400 0 to 2000 10
HF1000 100 to 400 0 to 2000 10
HF1400 100 to 400 0 to 2000 10
oXiris 100 to 400 0 to 2000 10
septeX 100 to 400 0 to 1000 10
X-MARS 100 to 400 0 to 1000 10

Solution flow rates
Set Replace- Replace- Replace- Dialysate PBP flow

ment flow ment flow ment flow flow range range
range range increment (ml/h) (ml/h)
predilu- postdilu- (ml/h)
tion (ml/h) tion (ml/h)
M100 0 to 8000 0 to 6000 50 0 to 8000 0 to 4000
ST100 0 to 8000 0 to 6000 50 0 to 8000 0 to 4000
M150 0 to 8000 0 to 8000 50 0 to 8000 0 to 4000
ST150 0 to 8000 0 to 8000 50 0 to 8000 0 to 4000
HF1000 0 to 8000 0 to 8000 50 0 to 8000 0 to 4000
HF1400 0 to 8000 0 to 8000 50 0 to 8000 0 to 4000
oXiris 0 to 8000 0 to 8000 50 0 to 8000 0 to 4000
septeX 0 0 to 500 50 0 to 8000 0 to 500
X-MARS 0 to 4000 0 to 4000 50 0 to 8000 0 to 4000

(ml/min) (ml/min)
M100 10 to 100 70 5 50 to 100 5
ST100 10 to 100 70 5 50 to 100 5
M150 10 to 100 70 5 50 to 100 5
ST150 10 to 100 70 5 50 to 100 5
HF1000 10 to 100 70 5 50 to 100 5
HF1400 10 to 100 70 5 50 to 100 5
oXiris 10 to 100 70 5 50 to 100 5
septeX 10 to 100 70 5 50 to 100 5
X-MARS 10 to 100 70 5 50 to 100 5

TPE Disposable Sets
Low flow sets

(ml)
TPE1000 2 2000 50 to 180 5 71
TPE20 1 1000 50 to 180 5 65

(ml/min) (ml/min)
TPE1000 10 to 100 40 5 30-100 5
TPE20 10 to 100 40 5 30-100 5

High flow sets

(ml)
TPE2000 3 3000 100 to 5 125
250/4003
TPE60 1 1000 100 to 400 5 146

(ml/min) (ml/min)
TPE2000 10 to 100 70 5 50 to 100 5
TPE60 10 to 100 70 5 50 to 100 5
3 Depending on machine default set up

HP Kits

(ml)
Adsorba 3 2500 50 to 250 10 247
150
Adsorba 3 2500 100 to 350 10 367
300
HP-X User 1000 to 50 to 450 10 1085
defined4 15000

(ml/min) (ml/min)
Adsorba 10 to 100 70 5 30 to 100 5
150
Adsorba 10 to 100 70 5 50 to 100 5
300
HP-X 10 to 100 50 5 50 to 100 5
4 Defined by dividing priming volume and bag volume for user defined cartridge
in Custom mode.
5 Only for the line set. Blood volume for user defined cartridge shall be added for
total blood volume.

Chapter 9
Equations
Blood pump flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
Filter pressure drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
Effluent flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
Transmembrane pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
Total predilution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
CRRT prescription indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
Filtration Fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:4
Doses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:4
Patient fluid removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:5
Access transmembrane pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:5
Software Calculations of Target Patient Plasma Loss . . . . . . . . . . . 9:5
Formulas used in TPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:6
Patient plasma loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:6
PBP flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:7
Syringe flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:7
G5005209 Equations 9:1

Blood pump flow rate
The PBP solution is added to the access line immediately after the
patient’s blood enters from the access site, and before the access
line reaches the blood pump. Because of this, the amount of blood
actually pumped with each revolution of the blood pump is reduced.
To maintain the set blood flow, the Prismaflex software increases the
blood pump flow:
QBP = Qb + Qpbp
Where QBP is blood pump flow (ml/min), Qb is set blood flow

(ml/min) and Qpbp is set PBP flow (ml/min).
Filter pressure drop

Filter pressure drop is a calculated value used to determine pressure
conditions in the blood compartment of the filter. Filter pressure drop
is calculated by Prismaflex software as follows:
ΔPfil = Pfil – Pret
Where ΔPfil is Filter pressure drop (mmHg), Pfil is Filter pod pressure
(mmHg) and Pret is Return sensor pressure (mmHg)
Filter pressure and Return pressure readings are automatically

corrected for hydrostatic pressure biases (–25 mmHg).
Effluent flow rate

The formula which governs the effluent pump rate for CRRT:
Qeff = Qpfr + Qpbp + Qrep + Qdial + Qsyr
Where Qeff is Effluent rate (ml/h), Qpfr is Patient fluid removal rate
(ml/h), Qpbp is PBP flow rate (ml/h), Qrep is Replacement solution
rate (ml/h), Qdial is Dialysate solution rate (ml/h) and Qsyr is Syringe
flow rate (ml/h)
The Prismaflex software automatically calculates the effluent flow

rate needed to achieve the patient plasma loss rate. Any replacement
solution infused by the Prismaflex control unit is automatically
accounted for, as shown below:
Qeff = Qppl + Qrep
Where Qeff is Effluent rate (ml/h), Qppl is Patient plasma loss rate
(ml/h) and Qrep is Replacement fluid rate (ml/h)
9:2 Equations G5005209

Transmembrane pressure
Transmembrane pressure is the pressure exerted on the filter membrane
during operation of the Prismaflex system. It reflects the pressure
difference between the blood and fluid compartments of the filter.
The TMP is calculated by Prismaflex software as follows:
TMP = [(Pfil + Pret) / 2] – Peff
Where TMP is Transmembrane pressure (mmHg), Pfil is Filter pressure

(mmHg), Pret is Return pressure (mmHg) and Peff is Effluent pressure
(mmHg)
Filter pressure and effluent pressure readings are automatically

corrected by software for hydrostatic pressure biases to compute and
display TMP data (–18 mmHg correction).
Total predilution
The Prismaflex software calculates the total predilution value, which
is the ratio of prefilter blood dilution to the total blood dilution. Total
predilution is calculated according to the formula below:
PRE%tot = (Qpbp + Qrep(pre)) / (Qpbp + Qrep)
Where PRE%tot is Total predilution (%), Qpbp is PBP flow rate (ml/h),
Qreppre is Pre-filter replacement flow rate (ml/h), Qrep is Replacement
flow rate (ml/h)
CRRT prescription indicators

Three prescription indicators are computed as a function of flow rate
settings, patient body weight and hematocrit value:
• Filtration Fraction represents the level of internal filtration over the

filter membrane within the disposable set.
• Effluent Dose represents the effluent flow rate normalized to

patient body weight.
• Ultrafiltration Dose represents the fluid amounts contributed by

PBP, replacement and patient fluid removal rates, normalized to
patient body weight.

Following abbreviations are used in the equations for each prescription
indicator:
Abbreviation Explanation Unit

DCRRT-eff Effluent dose ml/kg/h
Qeff Effluent flow rate ml/h
BW Patient body weight kg
DCRRT-UFR Ultrafiltration dose ml/kg/h
Qplasma Plasma water flow rate (at patient ml/h
access)
Qpre Pre-infusion flow rate ml/h
QUFR Ultrafiltration rate ml/h
Qpbp PBP flow rate ml/h
Qdial Dialysate flow rate ml/h
Qrep Replacement flow rate ml/h
Qpfr Patient fluid removal flow rate ml/h
QPpfl Prescribed patient fluid loss ml/h
Qb Blood flow rate ml/h
PRE% Predilution %
Hct Hematocrit (default value 30%) %
FF Filtration fraction %
With
Qeff = Qpbp + Qdial + Qrep + Qpfr
Qplasma = (1 – (Hct / 100)) × Qb
Qpre = Qpbp + (PRE% / 100) × Qrep
QUFR = Qpbp + Qrep + Qpfr
Filtration Fraction
Filtration fraction (FF) is calculated according to the formula below:
FF = 100 × (QUFR) / (Qplasma × 0.95 + Qpre)
Doses
Effluent dose (DCRRT-eff) and the Ultrafiltration dose (DCRRT-UFR) are

calculated according to the formula below:
DCRRT-eff = Qeff / BW
DCRRT-UFR = [Qplasma / (Qplasma + Qpre)] × (QUFR / BW)

Patient fluid removed
The four precision scales mounted on the bottom of the
Prismaflex control unit support the PBP, replacement solution,
dialysate, and effluent bags and constantly measure the weight of the
bags. The change in combined weight of the fluid bags in use indicates
how much fluid has been removed from the patient by the control unit.
When fluid bags are replaced, the software automatically accounts for
the new bag weights. The following formula applies:
Vpfr = Veff – Vpbp – Vdial – Vrep – Vsyr
Where Vpfr is Patient fluid removed (ml), Veff is Effluent bag volume
(ml), Vpbp is PBP pumped (ml), Vdial is Dialysate pumped (ml), Vrep
is Replacement solution pumped (ml) and Vsyr is Syringe solution
pumped (ml).
Access transmembrane pressure

Access transmembrane pressure is the pressure difference between the
blood and fluid compartments at the inlet side of the filter.
The TMPa is calculated by Prismaflex software as follows:
TMPa = Pfil – Peff
Where TMPa is Access transmembrane pressure (mmHg), Pfil is Filter

pressure (mmHg) and Peff is Effluent pressure (mmHg)
Filter pressure and effluent pressure readings are automatically

corrected by software for hydrostatic pressure biases to compute and
display TMPa data (–30 mmHg correction).
Software Calculations of Target Patient Plasma Loss

Prismaflex software calculates a Target Patient Plasma Loss
based on settings entered by the operator. This calculated
value is displayed on the Enter TPE Prescription and
Enter Flow Settings screens.
Software calculates the Target Patient Plasma Loss by first determining

the treatment time according to the formula below.
T = Vrep(tot) / Qrep
Where T is Treatment time (h), Vrep(tot) is Volume to replace (Total

Replacement Volume (ml)) and Qrep is Replacement fluid rate (ml/h)
Target Patient Plasma Loss is then calculated as follows:
Vppl(tgt) = Qppl × T
Where Vppl(tgt) is Target patient plasma loss (ml), Qppl is Patient

plasma loss rate (ml/h) and T is Treatment time (h)

Formulas used in TPE
Below is a summary of the formulas used by Prismaflex software in
managing TPE. Software calculations are based on the operator-set TPE
Prescription and flow rate values. The results of software calculations
are displayed on the Enter TPE Prescription and/or
Flow Rates screens.
Vplasma = (100 – Hct) × 0.7 × BW
where Vplasma is Patient plasma volume (ml), Hct is Hematocrit (%),

BW is Patient body weight (kg)
Rexch = Vrep(tot) / Vplasma
where Rexch is Plasma volume exchange (dimensionless), Vrep(tot)

is Total Replacement Volume (ml) and Vplasma is Patient plasma
volume (ml)
Hctpost = [(Qb / (Qb – Qeff)] × Hct
where Hctpost is Post-filter Hematocrit (%), Qb is Operator set blood

flow rate (ml/h), Hct is Hematocrit (%) and Qeff is Effluent flow rate
(ml/h)
FF = 100 × (Qrep + Qppl) / (Qplasma × 0.95 + Qpbp)
Qplasma = (1 – (Hct / 100)) × Qb
where FF is Filter fraction (%), Qppl is Patient plasma loss rate (ml/h),
Qrep is Replacement flow rate (ml/h), Qb is Operator set blood flow
rate (ml/h), Hct is Hematocrit (%), Qpbp is PBP flow rate (ml/h) and
Qplasma is plasma flow rate (ml/h)
Veff(tgt) = Qeff × T
where Veff(tgt) is Target effluent (ml), Qeff is Effluent rate (ml/h) and T
is Treatment time (h)
Vppl(tgt) = Qppl × T
where Vppl(tgt) is Target patient plasma loss (ml), Qppl is Patient plasma
loss rate (ml/h) and T is Treatment time (h)
Patient plasma loss

The replacement scale and effluent scale mounted on the bottom of the
Prismaflex control unit support the replacement fluid bag/container
and effluent bag and constantly measure their weights. The change in
combined weight of the fluid bags/containers in use indicates how
much plasma has been removed from the patient by the control unit.
When fluid bags/containers are replaced, the software automatically

accounts for their new weights. The following formula applies:
Vppl = Veff – Vrep

Where Vppl is Patient plasma loss (ml), Veff is Effluent bag volume
(ml) and Vrep is Replacement solution volume (ml)
PBP flow rate

In citrate anticoagulation, PBP flow rate is kept proportional to blood
flow rate and computed by the software through the equation:
Qpbp = (Qb × Dcit) / [Cit]
Where Qpbp is PBP flow rate (ml/h), Qb is Blood flow rate (ml/h), Dcit
is Citrate dose expressed in millimole per liter of blood (mmol/l blood)
and [Cit] is citrate concentration of the PBP solution (mmol/l).
Syringe flow rate

method, the syringe flow rate is kept proportional to the estimated
calcium loss rate in effluent. It is computed by the software of the
Prismaflex system through the equation:
Qsyr = CaComp × JCa / [Ca] - Qrep × [Carep] / [Ca]
Where CaComp is the calcium compensation, Qsyr is syringe flow rate

(ml/h), JCa is estmated calcium loss rate in effluent (mmol/h), [Ca] is
calcium concentration of the syringe solution (mmol/l), Qrep is the
replacement flow rate (ml/h), and [Carep] is calcium concentration of
the replacement solution in post-dilution (mmol/l).


Gambro Prismaflex Dialysis - Service Manual PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Gambro Prismaflex Dialysis - Service Manual PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Prismaﬂex®

1. Before you get started

About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2

About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2

Prismaflex® Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2

About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2

5. Alarms and Troubleshooting

About this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2

About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3

Blood pump flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2

Before you get started

G5005209 Prismaﬂex® Service Manual - Before you get started 1:1

This service manual also provides a technical description of the

Keywords Used in this Manual

1:2 Prismaﬂex® Service Manual - Before you get started G5005209

Responsibility and Disclaimer

• If any modifications to the equipment have been authorized in

• If the electrical installation for powering the equipment complies

• If the equipment is used in accordance with the Service Manual

Gambro will provide, on request, a service manual which contains

Gambro does not accept any responsibility or liability for use of

Since Gambro has no control over service work which is not

G5005209 Prismaﬂex® Service Manual - Before you get started 1:3

Note: Notes are added to give more information.

1:4 Prismaﬂex® Service Manual - Before you get started G5005209

The maintenance and calibration information is provided in this

It is mandatory to perform at least one preventive maintenance once a

Competence of Service Engineers

A Service Engineer is considered authorized if he/she has:

1. Attended Prismaflex technical service course and has been given a

2. Access to the recommended test equipment and special tools

3. Access to the recommended Prismaflex control unit - Spare parts

4. Access to and understanding of the Prismaflex control unit - Service

In general, this policy implies that training will be carried out by

G5005209 Prismaﬂex® Service Manual - Before you get started 1:5

Equipment applied part is Type CF, defibrillation-proof per IEC

Device meets the “drip proof” classification requirements.

Device requires an alternating supply current.

Nearby high-voltage conductors could be hazardous if contacted.

This symbol is located near functional ground locations on this device.

This symbol is located near protective ground locations on this device.

This symbol identifies the point of connection of a potential

Certain components within this equipment are sensitive to electrostatic

Instructions and warnings

1:6 Prismaﬂex® Service Manual - Before you get started G5005209

This symbol warns against an incline of the Prismaflex control unit of

Pull out scale completely before hanging bag.

Pull out scale completely before hanging bag.

Risk of tipping the Prismaflex control unit from pushing, leaning,

This symbol is applied on the stand if the Prismaflex calibration weight

Manufacturer. The year of manufacture may be included in the symbol

G5005209 Prismaﬂex® Service Manual - Before you get started 1:7

RS232 Serial Communication port.

Remote alarm connection.

The device contains toxic or hazardous substances or elements.

Recycle the cardboard.

Transportation and storage

The maximum stacking load permitted on the transport package is

This end up.

1:8 Prismaﬂex® Service Manual - Before you get started G5005209

Humidity limitation. Upper and lower limits are expressed with

Temperature limitation. Upper and lower limits are expressed with

Triangle sign; placed as colored symbol on PBP scale and in the